OM50F42U
User Manual: 2018 Lexus LS 500H Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 528
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Pictorial index Search by illustration For safety and security Make sure to read through them (Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system) 1 Vehicle status information and indicators Reading driving-related information (Main topics: Meters, multi-information display) 2 Before driving Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving (Main topics: Keys, doors, seats) 3 Driving Operations and advice which are necessary for driving (Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling) 4 Interior features Usage of the interior features (Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features) 5 Maintenance and care Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures (Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs) 6 When trouble arises What to do in case of malfunction and emergency (Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire) 7 Vehicle specifications Vehicle specifications, customizable features (Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure) 8 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners 9 Index LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Search by symptom Search alphabetically 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS For your information ......................................6 Reading this manual.................................... 10 How to search .................................................11 Pictorial index .................................................12 1 For safety and security 1-1. For safe use Before driving....................................22 For safe driving..................................23 Seat belts .............................................24 SRS airbags ........................................29 Pop Up Hood ................................... 38 Front passenger occupant classification system ................................. 40 Exhaust gas precautions .............. 44 1-2. Child safety Riding with children........................ 45 Child restraint systems ................. 45 1-3. Hybrid system Hybrid system features................. 58 Hybrid system precautions ...........61 1-4. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ........................ 66 Alarm.................................................... 68 2 Vehicle status information and indicators 2-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators.....72 Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models) ............................77 Gauges and meters (F SPORT models).............................................. 81 Multi-information display............. 86 Head-up display ...............................92 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Energy monitor/consumption screen ................................................96 3 Before driving 3-1. Key information Keys .................................................... 104 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors .................................................108 Trunk ....................................................112 Smart access system with push-button start ............................................119 3-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats........................................ 128 Power rear seat ............................. 135 Driving position memory........... 139 Rear seat position memory........143 Head restraints ...............................144 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel ................................147 Inside rear view mirror ............... 148 Outside rear view mirrors......... 149 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Power windows ...............................151 Moon roof........................................ 153 4 Driving 4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle........................ 158 Cargo and luggage...................... 164 Vehicle load limits......................... 166 Trailer towing.................................. 166 TABLE OF CONTENTS Dinghy towing ................................ 167 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function.......................................... 273 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function...........................................277 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) ..........................................................280 Parking Support Brake function (static objects)............................ 286 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) ...........291 Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) ..................... 295 Driving mode select switch ..... 298 Electronically modulated air suspension.......................................... 299 Driving assist systems ................ 302 4-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch ...............168 EV drive mode ............................... 172 Hybrid transmission ..................... 174 Turn signal lever.............................180 Parking brake .................................. 181 Brake Hold.......................................183 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch............................185 AHB (Automatic High Beam) ............................................................188 Windshield wipers and washer ............................................................190 4-4. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap......... 194 4-5. Using the driving support systems Lexus Safety System+A.............. 196 Lexus Safety System+ ................203 PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) ...........................................................209 PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+) ...........................................................220 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) ........................................................... 227 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)........230 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) ....240 RSA (Road Sign Assist)............. 247 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.........................250 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .......260 PKSA (Parking Support Alert) ........................................................... 265 Intuitive parking assist ................ 266 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 4-6. Driving tips Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....... 307 Winter driving tips....................... 309 5 Interior features 5-1. Remote Touch/Display Remote Touch.................................314 Center Display............................... 316 Rear Multi Operation Panel .... 318 5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge Lexus Climate Concierge..........321 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front automatic air conditioning system............................................ 323 Rear air conditioning system... 333 Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators................... 336 5-4. Using the interior lights Interior lights list ........................... 340 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5-5. Using the storage features List of storage features............... 343 Trunk features................................348 5-6. Using the other interior features Other interior features ............... 351 Garage door opener..................358 Lexus Enform Safety Connect ........................................................... 364 6 Maintenance and care 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...................................370 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .................................... 373 6-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements .....378 General maintenance ................ 379 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ............382 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions ...........................................................383 Hood..................................................385 Positioning a floor jack...............385 Engine compartment..................387 12-volt battery................................ 393 Tires ................................................... 395 Replacing the tire.........................405 Tire inflation pressure.................408 Wheels...............................................410 Air conditioning filter.................... 411 Electronic key battery ................. 413 Checking and replacing fuses ............................................................ 414 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Light bulbs.........................................417 7 When trouble arises 7-1. Essential information Emergency flashers .................... 420 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ............................ 420 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed ...........................................................422 If you think something is wrong .......................................................... 426 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds......................427 If a warning message is displayed .......................................................... 437 If you have a flat tire .....................442 If the hybrid system will not start .......................................................... 443 If you lose your keys.................... 444 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened .......................................... 445 If the electronic key does not operate properly................................. 445 If the 12-volt battery is discharged .......................................................... 447 If your vehicle overheats........... 453 If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 457 8 Vehicle specifications 8-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ................................................. 460 Fuel information............................ 470 Tire information .............................472 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 8-2. Customization Customizable features................481 8-3. Initialization Items to initialize ........................... 495 9 For owners 1 9-1. For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ...........................................498 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....................498 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)..........500 Index What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ... ...........................................................508 Alphabetical Index......................... 511 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Installation of a mobile two-way radio system The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: Hybrid system Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Lexus Safety System+A Lexus Safety System+ Anti-lock brake system Vehicle dynamics integrated management SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. High voltage parts and cables on the 7 hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio. Vehicle data recordings Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: Engine speed Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) Accelerator status Brake status Vehicle speed Shift position Hybrid battery (traction battery) status Images from the camera sensor (available only in situations when sudden inputs occur while driving [sudden acceleration, etc.], the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating, the Parking Support Brake function [static objects] was operating, or your vehicle was involved in a collision) The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations. Data usage Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only) If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage. Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynam- 8 ics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. • An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Disclosure of the EDR data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Lexus may: • Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance • Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner devices and Pop Up Hood system in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags, seat belt pretensioners and Pop Up Hood micro gas generators left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro gas generators removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pre- 9 tensioners, Pop Up Hood system, and wireless remote control batteries. WARNING ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding chil- dren’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 10 Reading this manual Symbols Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Explains symbols used in this manual. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). Symbols in this manual Symbols Meanings Meanings WARNING: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people. NOTICE: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment. Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order. Symbols in illustrations LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Symbols Meanings Indicates the component or position being explained. Means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen. 11 How to search ■ Searching by name Alphabetical index: →P.511 ■ Searching by installation position Pictorial index: →P.12 ■ Searching by symptom or sound What to do if... (Troubleshooting): →P.508 ■ Searching by title Table of contents: →P.2 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 12 Pictorial index Pictorial index ■Exterior A Doors ......................................................................................................................... P.108 Locking/unlocking ............................................................................................................P.108 Opening/closing the side windows .............................................................................P.151 Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ................................................P.445 Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................ P.427, 437 B Trunk............................................................................................................................ P.112 Opening from inside the cabin ......................................................................................P.114 Opening from outside .......................................................................................................P.115 Opening by using the mechanical key .................................................................... P.446 Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................ P.427, 437 C Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.149 Adjusting the mirror angle............................................................................................. P.149 Folding the mirrors............................................................................................................ P.150 Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139 Defogging the mirrors ....................................................................................................P.323 D Windshield wipers ..................................................................................................P.190 Pictorial index Precautions for winter season.....................................................................................P.309 To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*................................................. P.327 Precautions for car wash .................................................................................................P.371 E Fuel filler door..........................................................................................................P.194 Refueling method .............................................................................................................. P.194 Fuel type/fuel tank capacity ...........................................................................................P.461 F Tires............................................................................................................................P.395 Tire size/inflation pressure ............................................................................... P.395, 466 Winter tires/tire chains ..................................................................................................P.309 Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system..............................................P.395 Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................ P.442 G Hood ......................................................................................................................... P.385 Opening ...............................................................................................................................P.385 Engine compartment cover ........................................................................................ P.388 Engine oil.............................................................................................................................. P.462 Coping with overheating...............................................................................................P.453 Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437 Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving (Replacing method: P.417) H Headlights/cornering lights ................................................................................P.185 I Parking lights/daytime running lights...............................................................P.185 J Turn signal lights..................................................................................................... P.180 K Tail lights ....................................................................................................................P.185 Stop lights Hill-start assist control ....................................................................................................P.303 L License plate lights .................................................................................................P.185 M Back-up lights Changing the shift position to R....................................................................................P.174 N Side marker lights ...................................................................................................P.185 *: If equipped LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 13 14 Pictorial index ■Instrument panel A Power switch ............................................................................................................P.168 Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes.................................................. P.168 Emergency stop of the hybrid system......................................................................P.420 When the hybrid system will not start ......................................................................P.443 Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437 B Shift lever................................................................................................................... P.174 Changing the shift position.............................................................................................P.176 Precautions for towing ................................................................................................... P.422 C Meters................................................................................................................... P.77, 81 Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light............P.77, 79, 81, 85 Warning lights/indicator lights ...................................................................................... P.72 When a warning light turns on .................................................................................... P.427 D Multi-information display .......................................................................................P.86 Display......................................................................................................................................P.86 Energy monitor..................................................................................................................... P.97 When a warning messages is displayed.................................................................. P.437 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Pictorial index E Parking brake switch ..............................................................................................P.181 Applying/releasing the parking brake........................................................................P.181 Precautions for winter season...................................................................................... P.310 Warning buzzer/messages.......................................................................................... P.437 F Turn signal lever ..................................................................................................... P.180 Headlight switch......................................................................................................P.185 Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights........................... P.185 AHB (Automatic High Beam)......................................................................................P.188 G Windshield wiper and washer switch................................................................P.190 Usage...................................................................................................................................... P.190 Adding washer fluid.........................................................................................................P.392 Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437 H Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.420 I Hood lock release lever...................................................................................... P.385 J Tilt and telescopic steering control switch...................................................... P.147 Adjustment ............................................................................................................................P.147 Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139 K Air conditioning system ...................................................................................... P.323 Usage.....................................................................................................................................P.323 Rear window defogger...................................................................................................P.323 L Audio system* M Brake hold switch....................................................................................................P.183 N Trunk opener main switch .....................................................................................P.118 * : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 15 16 Pictorial index ■Switches A HUD (Head-up display) switch*1 ..........................................................................P.92 B Camera switch*1, 2 C Instrument panel light control switches .....................................................P.79, 85 D “ODO TRIP” switch .........................................................................................P.79, 85 E VSC OFF switch.................................................................................................... P.304 Snow mode switch .................................................................................................. P.177 F Driving mode select switch................................................................................ P.298 G Trunk opener switch................................................................................................ P.114 H Fuel filler door opener switch..............................................................................P.195 *1 : If equipped *2 : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Pictorial index A Position memory buttons......................................................................................P.139 B Mode change button .............................................................................................P.130 C Window lock switch ...............................................................................................P.153 D Outside rear view mirror switches....................................................................P.149 E Door lock switches ..................................................................................................P.110 F Power window switches......................................................................................... P.151 Rear door sunshade switches* .......................................................................... P.355 * : If equipped A Meter control switches ...........................................................................................P.87 B Paddle shift switches..............................................................................................P.178 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 17 18 Pictorial index C Phone switch*1 D LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch*2 ................................................................. P.230 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch*2.............................................................. P.240 E Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch ..................................................................P.254 F Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... P.250 G Audio remote control switches*1 H Talk switch*1 *1 : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. *2: If equipped A Remote Touch*1.......................................................................................................P.314 B Seat switch ................................................................................................................P.129 C Rear sunshade switch*2 .......................................................................................P.356 D EV drive mode switch ............................................................................................ P.172 E Vehicle height adjustment switch*2 .................................................................P.299 F P position switch...................................................................................................... P.176 *1: *2 Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. : If equipped LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Pictorial index ■Interior A SRS airbags.................................................................................................................P.29 B Floor mats....................................................................................................................P.22 C Front seats.................................................................................................................P.128 D Head restraints........................................................................................................P.144 E Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.24 F Inside lock buttons...................................................................................................P.110 G Console box.............................................................................................................P.346 H Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.345 I Assist grips .............................................................................................................. P.352 J Coat hooks.............................................................................................................. P.352 K Rear Multi Operation Panel*1 ............................................................................P.318 L Rear seat entertainment system*1, 2 *1: *2 If equipped : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 19 20 Pictorial index ■Ceiling A Moon roof switches................................................................................................P.153 B Personal lights..........................................................................................................P.341 C “SOS” button* .........................................................................................................P.364 D Auxiliary box............................................................................................................P.347 E Vanity mirrors .........................................................................................................P.354 F Sun visors..................................................................................................................P.354 G Door-linked interior light switch ........................................................................P.341 H Inside rear view mirror ..........................................................................................P.148 I Garage door opener buttons............................................................................ P.358 J Interior light ..............................................................................................................P.341 *: If equipped LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 21 For safety and security 1 1-1. For safe use . Before driving.................................22 For safe driving.............................. 23 SRS airbags .................................... 29 Pop Up Hood ................................ 38 Front passenger occupant classification system .............................. 40 Exhaust gas precautions ........... 44 1-2. Child safety Riding with children..................... 45 Child restraint systems .............. 45 1-3. Hybrid system Hybrid system features.............. 58 Hybrid system precautions ....... 61 1-4. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ..................... 66 Alarm................................................. 68 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security Seat belts ..........................................24 1 22 1-1. For safe use 1-1.For safe use Before driving Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving. Installing floor mats Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet. 1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets. WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ When installing the driver’s floor mat ● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats. ● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat. ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. ● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. ● Do not place the floor mat bot- tom-side up or upside-down. 2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place. ■ Before driving ● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor. ● With the hybrid system stopped and Always align the marks A . The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) the shift position in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat. 1-1. For safe use For safe driving For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving. Correct driving posture 23 ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint. seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads. A Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P.128) B Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P.128) C Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P.144) D Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P.24) WARNING ■ For safe driving Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately. Correct use of the seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P.24) Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.45) Adjusting the mirrors Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P.148, 149) For safety and security ● Do not place anything under the front 1 24 1-1. For safe use Seat belts ■ Pregnant women Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. WARNING Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. ● Always wear a seat belt properly. ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children. ● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.25) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.25) ■ When children are in the vehicle →P.53 ■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allow- ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. ● Inspect the seat belt system periodi- cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.45) ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P.24) ■ Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. Correct use of the seat belts Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. WARNING ■ Using a seat belt extender Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. ● Do not use the seat belt extender Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. ● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. 1 For safety and security the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage. 25 26 1-1. For safe use Easy Access Buckle (front seats)* NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. Fastening and releasing the seat belt The front seat belt buckles move outward automatically for easier access. When a front door is opened, the seat belt buckle for the corresponding seat will move outward automatically. The buckle will retract automatically after the plate is inserted and locked to the buckle. 1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. 2 To release the seat belt, press the release button A . If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P.45) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When entering the vehicle When exiting the vehicle (driver’s seat only) If the power switch is turned off when the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the driver’s seat belt buckle will move outward. The buckle will retract automatically when the driver’s seat belt is released. * : If equipped ■ Easy Access Buckle ● If the seat belt buckle is not latched when it is in the outward position, it will return to its original position after a certain amount of time. ● If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves the front door open and then enters the vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not operate until the door is closed and then opened again. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) 1-1. For safe use Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats) 27 Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats) 1 Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. WARNING ■ Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover. The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact. ■ Replacing the belt after the preten- sioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. WARNING ■ Seat belt pretensioners Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security 1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button A . 2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up. 28 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● Do not place anything, such as a cush- ion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision. ● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer. Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function (front seats of vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) When the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher, the seat belts will retract slightly to remove any slack. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belts will retract before the collision. (→P.210) ■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function A motor sound may be heard when a front seat belt is released or a front door is opened. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 29 SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. SRS airbag system SRS front airbags A SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components B SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection SRS side and curtain shield airbags C SRS front side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants D SRS rear side airbags Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats E SRS curtain shield airbags LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security ■ Location of the SRS airbags 1 30 1-1. For safe use • Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats • Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover F SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped) Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants ■ SRS airbag system components A Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors) B Side impact sensors (front door) C Knee airbags D Front passenger airbag E Curtain shield airbags F “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights G Front side airbags H Side impact sensors (front) I SRS warning light J Rear side airbags K Seat belt pretensioners L Driver airbag M Seat cushion airbags (if equipped) N Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped) O Side impact sensors (rear) P Driver’s seat position sensor LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. For safe use 31 Q Driver’s seat belt buckle switch R Airbag sensor assembly S Front impact sensors T Pop Up Hood computer assembly ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases. ● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ● The windshield may crack. ● The emergency flashers will be turned on automatically. (→P.420) ● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations occur, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P.364) • An SRS airbag is deployed. • A seat belt pretensioner is activated. • The vehicle is involved in a severe rear-end collision. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags) ● The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cush- ion airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations: • If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact • If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck ● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. ● The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt. ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) ● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level 1 For safety and security Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. 32 1-1. For safe use of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 30 km/h]). ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may deploy in the event of a severe side collision. ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover. ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision. ■ Conditions under which the SRS air- bags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface ● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or falling ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags) The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may occur. ● Collision from the side ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration. ● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal. ● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment ● Collision from the side at an angle 1-1. For safe use 33 that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags and SRS cushion airbags to inflate. The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision. ● Collision from the rear ● Pitching end over end 1 ● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate. ● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat ■ When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. For safety and security The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the front ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover 34 1-1. For safe use WARNING ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● The surface of the seats with the side air- bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with ● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. For safe use WARNING • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. ● If the seat belt extender has been con- nected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P.45) ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees. 1 For safety and security The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. 35 36 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, side windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip. ● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy. ● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it. ● Do not use seat accessories which ● Do not attach anything to or lean any- thing against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy. cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components or the front doors. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● If the areas where the SRS airbags are 37 ● Modifications to your vehicle for a per- son with a physical disability stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not place anything, such as a cush- ■ Modification and disposal of SRS air- bag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, front door trims or front door speakers ● Modifications to the front door panel (such as making a hole in it) ● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment ● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier ● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen- sion system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 For safety and security ion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision. 38 1-1. For safe use Pop Up Hood In the event of a frontal collision with a body, such as a pedestrian, the Pop Up Hood system raises the hood to reduce the possibility of a serious impact to the pedestrian’s head area by adding clearance to the engine compartment. When the sensors located at the back of the front bumper detect a frontal impact with a body, such as a pedestrian, which meets or exceeds the threshold level while the vehicle is being driven within the operational speed range, the system operates. System components ■ Pop Up Hood operational conditions The Pop Up Hood will operate when the vehicle detects an impact such as the following: ● The front bumper detects a frontal impact equivalent to or greater than that of a pedestrian while the vehicle being driven within the operational speed range of approximately 16 to 34 mph (25 to 55 km/h). (The system is operated by an impact of threshold level or greater, even in the case of a minor collision that may not leave a trace on the front bumper. Also, depending on the impact conditions or vehicle speed, the system may operate by a collision with a light or small object or a small animal.) ● In other situations, such as the following the system may operate when an impact is applied to the lower part of the vehicle or front bumper: • Colliding with a curb • Falling into a deep hole • Landing hard • Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an undulating road, a protruding object or falling object ■ Conditions under which the Pop Up Hood may not operate properly ● If a pedestrian collides with the right or A Sensors B Hood C Lifters ■ Pop Up Hood precautions ● Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure to contact your Lexus dealer. ● The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated. Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) left corner of the front bumper or the side of the vehicle. As such impacts may be difficult to detect, the system may not operate. ● If the vehicle speed is not detected correctly, such as if the vehicle is sliding sideways, the system may not operate properly. ■ Conditions under which the Pop Up Hood will not operate The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the following situations: ● Colliding with a lying person ● A frontal impact applied to the front bumper while driving at speeds outside of the operational speed range ● A side impact or rear impact ● A vehicle rollover (In some accident situations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.) 1-1. For safe use WARNING ■ When the Pop Up Hood is operated ● Do not pull the hood lock release lever. Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has operated will further raise the hood and may cause an injury. Do not drive with the hood raised, as doing so may block the driver’s vision, possibly causing an accident. As the popped up hood cannot be lowered by hand, doing so may deform the hood or cause an injury. ● If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. If the Pop Up Hood has operated, stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not touch the lifters immediately after the Pop Up Hood has operated, as the lifters may be hot and burn you. NOTICE ■ Pop Up Hood precautions ● Make sure to close the hood before driving, as the system may not operate properly if the hood is not fully closed. ● Make sure that all 4 tires are of the specified size and inflated to the specified tire pressure. If tires of a different size are used, the system may not operate properly. ● If something has hit the area around the front bumper, the sensors may be damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has not operated. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not remove or repair the parts or wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing so may cause accidental operation or prevent the system from operating properly. If repair or replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not remove such components as the front bumper, hood or suspension, or replace them with non-genuine parts, as doing so may prevent the system from operating properly. ● Do not install anything to the front bumper or hood, as doing so may prevent the sensors from detecting an impact correctly and prevent the system from operating properly. ● Do not close the hood with force or apply load to the lifters, as doing so may damage the lifters and prevent the system from operating properly. ● Do not modify the suspension, as changes made to the vehicle height may prevent the system from operating properly. 1 For safety and security ● Do not forcibly push down the hood. 39 40 1-1. For safe use Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag. System components A Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light B SRS warning light For the U.S.A. C “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light D “AIR BAG ON” indicator light For Canada E “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light F “AIR BAG ON” indicator light WARNING ■ Front passenger occupant classifica- tion system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. 1-1. For safe use WARNING ● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indica- ● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket). ● Do not put weight on the front passen- ger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front pas- senger seat. ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. ● When it is unavoidable to install a for- ward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P.46) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks. ● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ● Do not modify or replace the uphol- stery of the front seat. 1 For safety and security tor light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision. 41 42 1-1. For safe use Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG ON” SRS warning light Off Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3 Indicator/warning light Front passenger airbag Devices Front passenger knee airbag Activated ■ Child*4 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi- “AIR BAG OFF” or cator lights “AIR BAG ON”*4 Indicator/warning light SRS warning light Off Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3 Front passenger airbag Devices Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated or activated*4 ■ Child restraint system with infant*5 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*6 SRS warning light Off Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3 Indicator/warning light Devices LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated 1-1. For safe use 43 ■ Unoccupied “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/warning light “AIR BAG OFF” SRS warning light Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag 1 Deactivated ■ There is a malfunction in the system “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” SRS warning light On Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off Indicator/warning light Devices Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated *1 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt *3 *4 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt : For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture. *5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for- ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P.45) *6 : In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P.46) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security Devices Off 44 1-1. For safe use Exhaust gas precautions Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled. WARNING Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ■ Important points while driving ● Keep the trunk lid closed. ● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi- cle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ When parking ● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system. ● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. ● Do not leave the hybrid system operat- ing in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Exhaust pipe The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 1-2. Child safety 1-2.Child safety 45 Child restraint systems Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual. It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc. Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system. Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (→P.111, 153) Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc. WARNING ■ When children are in the vehicle Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. Table of contents Points to remember: P.45 Child restraint system: P.46 When using a child restraint system: P.47 Child restraint system installation method • Fixed with a seat belt: P.49 • Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor: P.53 • Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap): P.55 Points to remember The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regula- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 For safety and security Riding with children 46 1-2. Child safety tions for child restraint systems. Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. WARNING ■ When a child is riding Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is provided in this manual. ● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ● Holding a child in your or someone else’s arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle. ■ Handling the child restraint system If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident. ● If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. ● Keep the child restraint system prop- erly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. Child restraint system ■ Types of child restraint system installation methods Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 47 1-2. Child safety Installation method Seat belt attachment Page P.49 1 P.53 Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attachment P.55 When using a child restraint system ■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat For the safety of a child, install child restraint systems to a rear seats. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Move the front seat fully rearward. Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position. Adjust the front of the seat cushion to the lowest position. Adjust the seat height to the uppermost position. Adjust the lumbar support to the lowest position. Adjust the shoulder bolster to the For safety and security Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment 48 1-2. Child safety lowest position (if equipped). Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position. Adjust the seatback side bolster to the widest position (if equipped). Adjust the seat cushion side bolster to the lowest position (if equipped). Adjust the hip support to the lowest position (if equipped). If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position. ■ When installing a child restraint system to a power rear seat (if equipped) When using a child restraint system in an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system. Adjust the seat cushion to the fully rearward position. Adjust the upper seatback to the rearmost position. Adjust the front of the seat cushion to the lowest position. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Adjust the head restraint to the lowest and rearmost position. Adjust the shoulder bolster to the lowest position. Adjust the lumbar support to the lowest position. Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position. Disable the automatic rear seat operation. (→P.318) For the rear seat with an ottoman (if equipped): Adjust the seatback to the most upright position and ottoman (footrest) to the stowed position. WARNING ■ When using a child restraint system Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. 1-2. Child safety WARNING ● A forward-facing child restraint system ● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position, move the seat to the rearmost position, and raise the seat to the upper most position, even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. ● Use child restraint system suitable to 1 ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the For safety and security may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. 49 the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat. child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system. ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. ■ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 50 1-2. Child safety ■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/con- mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. vertible seat 1 Adjust the rear seat Vehicles with power rear seat: If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. 2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. 3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.53) ■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat 1 Adjust the seat When using the front passenger seat If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoid- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-2. Child safety able, refer to P.47 for front passenger seat adjustment. 51 mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. When using the rear seat If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. 2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. 1 3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.55) 7 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.53) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security 5 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. 52 1-2. Child safety ■ Booster seat (→P.24) 1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.47 for front passenger seat adjustment. 2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Booster type ■ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system. High back type 4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position. WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint sys- tem Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 1-2. Child safety WARNING ● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. ● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. ● Follow all installation instructions pro- vided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P.26) ■ Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor ■ Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seat. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.) ■ Installation with LATCH system Install the child restraint system in LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 For safety and security ● Ensure that the belt and plate are 53 54 1-2. Child safety accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. 1 Vehicles with power rear seat: Adjust the seat If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. (→P.48) Type A 4 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates A the presence of a lower connector system. 2 Open the cover. 3 Insert the tab B into the slit A of the cover. The cover will be held open. A Canada only Type B 4 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint sys LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-2. Child safety tem indicates A the presence of a lower connector system. 55 WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint sys- tem Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● After securing a child restraint system, 1 ● When using the LATCH anchors, be For safety and security never adjust the seat. sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. ● Follow all installation instructions pro- vided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ● When securing some types of child A Canada only 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.55) 6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.53) ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap) ■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat. Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap. 56 1-2. Child safety Outboard rear seats Outboard rear seats A Anchor brackets A Hook B Top tether strap B Top tether strap Rear center seat Rear center seat A Anchor bracket A Hook B Top tether strap B Top tether strap ■ Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (→P.53) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819. WARNING ■ When installing a child restraint sys- tem Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 1-2. Child safety 57 WARNING ● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted. ● Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket. ● After securing a child restraint system, 1 ● Follow all installation instructions pro- For safety and security never adjust the seat. vided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ● Be sure to have the top tether strap pass over the top of the head restraint. If the belt passes below the head restraint, it is possible that the child restraint system may not be securely fixed. NOTICE ■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 58 1-3. Hybrid system 1-3.Hybrid system Hybrid system features Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care. The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions. System components ■ System components The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item. A Gasoline engine B Electric motor (traction motor) ■ When stopped/during start off The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped* and the electric motor (traction motor) is used. When the shift position is in N, the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged. * : When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. ■ During normal driving The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery 1-3. Hybrid system (traction battery) as necessary. ■ When accelerating sharply When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor). ing) The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged. ■ Regenerative braking In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery). ● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or M. ● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or M. ■ EV indicator The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped. ■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions: ● During gasoline engine warm-up LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging ● When the temperature of the hybrid bat- tery (traction battery) is high or low ● When the heater is switched on ● When the shift position is in M Depending on the circumstances, the gasoline engine may also not stop automatically in other situations. ■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery →P.447 ■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during exchange, etc. The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when parked. The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction: ● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment. ● Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), behind the rear 1 For safety and security ■ When braking (regenerative brak- 59 60 1-3. Hybrid system seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped. ● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops. ● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open. ● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling. ● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply. ● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released. ● Vibration may be felt or sounds may be heard when the gasoline engine starts or stops. ● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents on the both sides of the rear seatback. ■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and dis- posal Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) Vehicle proximity notification system When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h). LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Vehicle proximity notification system In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear. ● In very noisy areas ● In the wind or the rain Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) 1-3. Hybrid system 61 Hybrid system precautions Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle. The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item. A Warning label B Power control unit C Electric motor (traction motor) D Hybrid battery (traction battery) E Service plug F High voltage cables (orange) G Air conditioning compressor ■ Running out of fuel When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (→P.430) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security System components 1 be able to start. (The standard amount of fuel is about 3.4 gal. [13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is inclined.) ■ Electromagnetic waves ● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances. ● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts. ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can 62 1-3. Hybrid system change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions. ■ Starting the hybrid system in an extremely cold environment When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc. WARNING ■ High voltage precautions This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. ● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors. ● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle. ● Never try to open the service plug access hole located behind the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage. ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place to pre- vent subsequent accidents. While depressing the brake pedal, apply the parking brake and shift the shift position to P to stop the hybrid system. Then, slowly release the brake pedal. ● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors. ● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires. ● Do not touch the battery if liquid is leaking from or adhering to it. If electrolyte (carbonate ester-based organic electrolyte) from the hybrid battery (traction battery) comes into contact with the eyes or skin, it could cause blindness or skin wounds. In the unlikely event that it comes into contact with the eyes or skin, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water, and seek immediate medical attention. ● If electrolyte is leaking from the hybrid battery (traction battery), do not approach the vehicle. Even in the unlikely event that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is damaged, the internal construction of the battery will prevent a large amount of electrolyte from leaking out. However, any electrolyte that does leak out will give off a vapor. This vapor is an irritant to skin and eyes and could cause acute poisoning if inhaled. ● Do not bring burning or high-tem- perature items close to the electrolyte. The electrolyte may ignite and cause a fire. ● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, ■ Road accident cautions Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous. 1-3. Hybrid system WARNING ● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with four wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. (→P.422) ● Carefully inspect the ground under the ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) ● Your vehicle contains a sealed lith- ium-ion battery. ● Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through your Lexus dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself. Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury: • The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur. When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers. ● If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 1 For safety and security vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible. 63 64 1-3. Hybrid system Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents ● Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vents as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery). Emergency shut off system There are air intake vents on each side of the rear seatback with the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vents become blocked, hybrid battery output may be reduced. NOTICE ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents ● Make sure not to block the air intake vent with anything, such as a seat cover, plastic cover, or luggage. If the vents become blocked, the hybrid battery (traction battery) input and output may be restricted, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery (traction battery) output and a malfunction. When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer. Hybrid warning message A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ● When dust etc. has accumulated in the air intake vent, periodically clean it with a vacuum cleaner to prevent the vent from clogging. ● A filter is installed to the air intake vent. When the filter remains noticeably dirty even after cleaning the air intake vent, filter cleaning or replacement is recommended. When cleaning or replacing the filter, contact your Lexus dealer. Refer to P.374 for details on how to clean the filters. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, con- 1-3. Hybrid system 65 tact your Lexus dealer. 1 For safety and security LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 66 1-4. Theft deterrent system 1-4.Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts. Operating the system The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle ■ Certification for the immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-4. Theft deterrent system 67 For vehicles sold in Canada 1 ■ To ensure the system operates cor- rectly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For safety and security NOTICE 68 1-4. Theft deterrent system Alarm The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set: A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.) The hood is opened. Setting/canceling/stopping the alarm system ■ Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following: Nobody is in the vehicle. The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. ■ Canceling or stopping Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms: Unlock the doors. Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) ● The trunk is opened using the mechanical key. No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. ■ Setting Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle. 1-4. Theft deterrent system ● The 12-volt battery is recharged or ■ Alarm-operated door lock In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle: ● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated. ● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates cor- rectly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 For safety and security replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P.450) 69 70 1-4. Theft deterrent system LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 71 Vehicle status information and indicators 2 2-1. Instrument cluster . Warning lights and indicators ............................................................72 Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models) ........................ 77 Multi-information display.......... 86 Head-up display ........................... 92 Energy monitor/consumption screen ............................................ 96 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)........................................... 81 72 2-1. Instrument cluster 2-1.Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated. Except F SPORT models F SPORT models LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems. (red) (yellow) (yellow) (→P.427) Brake system warning light*1 (→P.427) Brake system warning light*1 (→P.427) High coolant temperature warning light*2 (→P.427) Charging system warning light*2 (→P.428) Low engine oil pressure warning light*2 (→P.428) (orange) (flashes) *1 (U.S.A.) (Canada) Malfunction indicator lamp (→P.428) Malfunction indicator lamp*1 (→P.428) (flashes) (flashes) *1 SRS warning light (→P.428) Pop Up Hood warning light*1 (→P.429) ABS warning light*1 (→P.429) (U.S.A.) Electric power steering system warning light*1 (→P.430) (flashes) (flashes or illuminates) LKA indicator (if equipped) (→P.431) Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator*1 (→P.432) RCTA OFF indicator*1 (→P.432) RCD OFF indicator (if equipped) (→P.432) PKSB OFF indicator*1 (→P.433) PCS warning light*1 (→P.433) Slip indicator*1 (→P.433) *1 ABS warning light (→P.429) (Canada) Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light*2 (→P.429) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Parking brake indicator (flashes) (→P.434) (U.S.A.) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators (red) (Canada) Electric power steering system warning light*1 (→P.430) Low fuel level warning light (→P.430) Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (→P.430) Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights*3 (→P.431) Tire pressure warning light*1 (→P.431) LTA indicator (if equipped) (→P.431) Brake system warning light*1 (U.S.A.) 73 74 2-1. Instrument cluster Parking brake indicator (flashes) (→P.434) (Canada) (flashes) Brake hold operated indicator*1 (→P.434) Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (→P.180) Master warning light*4 (→P.434) *1: These lights come on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Headlight indicator (→P.185) (U.S.A.) Tail light indicator (→P.185) (Canada) Headlight high beam indicator (→P.186) AHB indicator (→P.188) *2: This light illuminates on the multi-infor- PCS warning light*1, 2 (→P.212, 222) Cruise control indicator (→P.257) Dynamic radar cruise control indicator (→P.250) Cruise control “SET” indicator (→P.250) LTA indicator (if equipped) (→P.234) mation display. *3 *4 : This light illuminates on the center panel. : F SPORT models: This light comes on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. (white) WARNING ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) (green) LKA indicator (if equipped) (→P.242) LTA indicator (if equipped) (→P.234) LKA indicator (if equipped) (→P.243) LTA indicator (if equipped) (→P.234) (orange) LKA indicator (if equipped) (flashes) (→P.243) BSM outside rear view mirror indicators*1, 3 (→P.260, 273) 2-1. Instrument cluster 75 BSM indicator (→P.260) Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.267) RCTA OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.273) RCD OFF indicator*2 (→P.277) PKSB OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.281) (U.S.A.) “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator*1, 6 (→P.40) (Canada) Drive mode indicators (flashes) VSC OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.304) High mode indicator (if equipped) (→P.300) Smart access system with push-button start indicator*4 (→P.168) Snow mode indicator (→P.177) Normal mode indicator (→P.298) Custom mode indicator (→P.298) Comfort mode indicator (→P.298) Eco drive mode indicator (→P.298) Sport S mode indicator (→P.298) Sport S+ mode indicator (→P.298) “READY” indicator (→P.168) EV drive mode indicator (→P.172) (U.S.A.) (Canada) Parking brake indicator (→P.181) Parking brake indicator (→P.181) Brake hold standby indicator*1 (→P.183) Brake hold operated indicator*1 (→P.183) EV indicator (→P.59) Low outside temperature indicator*5 (→P.77, 81) Security indicator*6 (→P.66, 68) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Except F SPORT models F SPORT models Snow mode indicator (→P.177) Normal mode indicator (→P.298) Custom mode indicator (→P.298) Comfort mode indicator (→P.298) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators Slip indicator*1 (→P.303) “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator*1, 6 (→P.40) 76 2-1. Instrument cluster Eco drive mode indicator (→P.298) Sport S mode indicator (→P.298) Sport S+ mode indicator (→P.298) *1 : These lights come on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. *2: This light comes on when the system is turned off. *3 *4 : This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors. : This light illuminates on the multi-information display. *5: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on. *6 : This light illuminates on the center panel. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster 77 Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models) Meter display ■ Locations of gauges and meters 2 A Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature B Odometer and trip meter display (→P.79) C Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C) D Hybrid System Indicator Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78) This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298) E Speedometer F Clock Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353) G Shift position indicator (→P.176) H Shift range/gear position (→P.174) I Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank J Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle status information and indicators The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle. 78 2-1. Instrument cluster Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437) ■ Hybrid System Indicator operation and driving conditions are the same. ■ Hybrid System Indicator is displayed A Charge area Shows regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). B Hybrid Eco area Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions. C Eco area Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner. By keeping the bar display within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved. D Power area Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.) * : When used in this manual, regeneration refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy. ■ Engine speed On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) when The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in the following situations: ● The shift position is in D or M. ● The driving mode is other than sport mode. However, the Hybrid System Indicator will not be displayed when the analog and digital speedometers are both enabled on of the multi-information display. (→P.90) ■ Outside temperature display ● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: • When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) • When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. ■ Liquid crystal display →P.87 ■ Customization The gauges and meters can be customized on of the multi-information display. (→P.90) WARNING ■ The information display at low tem- peratures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. 2-1. Instrument cluster WARNING For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury. 79 changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter. NOTICE 2 ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. ● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P.453) Odometer and trip meter display ■ Display items ■ Pop-up display Distance until the next engine oil change will displayed when a warning message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is required is displayed. Changing the instrument panel light brightness The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter A/trip meter B Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. Distance until next engine oil change 1 Darker 2 Brighter Displays the distance the vehicle can be driven until an oil change is necessary. ■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and ■ Changing the display Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is pressed, the displayed item will be LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) night mode) The brightness of the meters changes between day mode and night mode. ● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or Vehicle status information and indicators ● Do not let the indicator needle of the 80 2-1. Instrument cluster when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright ● Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster 81 Gauges and meters (F SPORT models) Meter display ■ Locations of gauges and meters When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the gauge layout will change. (→P.85) Main meter in center position 2 A Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84) B Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature C Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C) D Hybrid System Indicator Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78) This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298) • Rev indicator (→P.83) • Rev peak (→P.83) E Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174) F Speedometer G Clock Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle status information and indicators The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle. 82 2-1. Instrument cluster H Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank I Shift position indicator (→P.176) J Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86) Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437) Main meter moved to the right The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle. A Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C) B Clock Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353) C Hybrid System Indicator Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78) This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298) • Rev indicator (→P.83) • Rev peak (→P.83) D Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174) E Speedometer F Shift position indicator (→P.176) G Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84) H Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster 83 I Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature J Multi-information display Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86) Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437) ■ Hybrid System Indicator ■ Rev indicator When the engine speed reaches a set speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped indicator ( A ) will be displayed on the tachometer. A Charge area Shows regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). The engine speed at which the rev indicator will begin to be displayed can be set on of the multi-information display. (→P.90) B Hybrid Eco area Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions. C Eco area Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner. By keeping the bar display within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved. D Power area Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.) * : When used in this manual, regeneration refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Rev peak When the engine speed reaches or exceeds 4000 rpm, an afterimage of the tachometer will be displayed at the highest engine speed for approximately 1 second. Vehicle status information and indicators The indicators will be displayed in amber when the engine speed reaches a set speed, and in red when the engine speed reaches the red zone. 2 84 2-1. Instrument cluster WARNING ■ The information display at low tem- peratures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. ■ Engine speed On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same. ■ Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in the following situations: ● The shift position is in D or M. ● The driving mode is other than sport mode. ■ Outside temperature display ● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: • When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) • When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. ■ Liquid crystal display For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components ● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. ● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P.453) Odometer and trip meter display ■ Display items Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. →P.87 Trip meter A/trip meter B ■ Customization Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. The gauges and meters can be customized on of the multi-information display. (→P.90) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Distance until next engine oil 2-1. Instrument cluster change Displays the distance the vehicle can be driven until an oil change is necessary. ■ Changing the display Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter. 1 Darker 2 Brighter ■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode) The brightness of the meters changes between day mode and night mode. ● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright ● Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark The display can be switched between the center and side positions. The distance until the next engine oil change will displayed when a warning message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is required is displayed. Changing the instrument panel light brightness The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators Changing the main meter location ■ Pop-up display 85 86 2-1. Instrument cluster Multi-information display Display and menu icons ■ Display (except F SPORT models) By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings. Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations. Main meter moved to the right By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings. Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations. ■ Display (F SPORT models) Main meter in center position The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related information. Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations. ■ Menu icons The menu icons will be displayed by pressing or trol switch. of the meter con- F SPORT models: The menu icons can be displayed when the main meter is moved to the right. Driving information display (→P.87) Navigation system-linked display (if equipped) (→P.89) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster Audio system-linked display (→P.90) Driving support system information display (→P.90) Warning message display (→P.437) Settings display (→P.90) ■ Liquid crystal display WARNING ■ Caution for use while driving ● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle. ● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle. ■ The information display at low tem- peratures →P.78, 84 Changing the meter display The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches. : Select menu icons / : Change displayed content, scroll up/down the screen and move the cursor up/down B Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset C Move the main meter* and return to the previous screen *: 2 F SPORT models Content of driving information ■ Display items (except F SPORT models) Press or of the meter control switch and select or . Then press to display the following items: Drive information 1 Drive information 2 Energy monitor (→P.97) Tire pressure (→P.397) Vehicle sway warning Display off ■ Display items (F SPORT models) Main meter in center position Press or of the meter control switch to display the following items: Drive information 1 Drive information 2 Tire pressure (→P.397) Gear positions Units Display off LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle status information and indicators Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display. / A 87 88 2-1. Instrument cluster Driving support system information* (→P.90) *: Can be selected when a driving support system is enabled. (→P.230, 240, 250) Main meter moved to the right Press or of the meter control switch and select or . Then press to display the following items: Drive information 1 Drive information 2 Energy monitor (→P.97) G-force Gear Position Vehicle sway warning Average fuel economy After reset: Displays average fuel consumption since the display was reset*1 After start: Displays average fuel consumption since hybrid system start After refuel: Displays average fuel consumption since refuel Average vehicle speed After reset: Displays average vehicle speed since the display was reset*1 After start: Displays average vehicle speed since hybrid system start Elapsed time After reset: Displays elapsed time since the display was reset*1 Tire pressure (→P.397) After start: Displays elapsed time since hybrid system start Display off Distance ■ Drive information 1/Drive infor- Driving range: Displays driving range with remaining fuel*2, 3 Displays drive information such as the following: After start: Displays the distance driven since hybrid system start Use the displayed values as a reference only. Blank: No item mation 2 Drive information 1 Other *1: • Current fuel consumption press and hold switch. • Average fuel economy (after reset) Drive information 2 your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • Average vehicle speed (after reset) changed on . (→P.90) Current fuel consumption Bar type: Displays instantaneous current fuel consumption LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) of the meter control *2: This distance is computed based on • Distance (driving range) Displayed items (listed below) can be To reset, display the desired item and *3 : When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display 2-1. Instrument cluster may not be updated. 89 turn amber and be held for 2 seconds. ■ G-force (F SPORT models) ■ Gear Position (F SPORT models) Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure. Displays the current shift range or gear position when the shift position is in D or M. ■ Units (F SPORT models) The units of measure used can be changed while driving. ■ Vehicle sway warning A Acceleration G-force on the vehi- cle B Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right G-forces) C Record of the maximum G-forces D Accelerator pedal input E Brake fluid pressure F Steering amount This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle. Resetting the record of maximum G-forces Press and hold of the meter control switch to reset the record. Peak hold function If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are generated, the G-force value display will LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention using a bar display. The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest. ■ Vehicle sway warning This display is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warning of the LTA (→P.236) or LKA (→P.244) are met. Navigation system-linked display (if equipped) Select to display the following navigation system-linked information. Route guidance to destination Compass display (heading-up display) ■ Route guidance to destination display When the route guidance to destination display is enabled on the head-up display, it 2 Vehicle status information and indicators Unlike the units setting performed on the settings display, the units setting performed on the drive information display can be changed while driving. 90 2-1. Instrument cluster will not be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.94) Audio system-linked display Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter control switches. Driving support system information display Select to display the operational status of the following systems: LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped) (→P.230) LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) (→P.240) Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P.250) RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (→P.247) Settings display ■ Meter display settings that can be changed Language Select to change the language displayed. Units Select to change the units of measure displayed. Speedometer display (except F SPORT models) tion 2 Select to select up to 2 items (→P.88) that will be displayed on each Drive information screen (Drive information 1 screen and Drive information 2 screen) respectively. Clock Select to switch between 12-hour display and 24-hour display. Pop-up display Select to enable/disable pop-up displays for each relevant system. Accent color Select to change the accent color on the screen, such as the cursor color. Tachometer setting Select to set the display of the Hybrid System Indicator or tachometer for each driving mode. Rev indicator (F SPORT models) • Select to enable/disable the rev indicator. • Select to set the engine speed at which the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be displayed. Rev peak (F SPORT models) Select to enable/disable the rev peak. EV indicator Select to enable/disable the EV indicator. Default setting Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting. ■ Vehicle functions and settings that can be changed Select to set the display of the speedometer to digital/analog/both digital and analog. →P.481 Drive information 1/Drive informa- ■ Suspension of the settings display ● Some settings cannot be changed while LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place. ● If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended. 91 sage will not be displayed. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING ■ Cautions during setting up the dis- NOTICE ■ During setting up the display To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features. Suggestion function Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches. ■ Suggestion to turn off the head- lights If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time with the headlight switch in after the power switch has been turned off, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you wish to turn the headlights off. To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”. If a front door is opened after the power switch is turned off, this suggestion mes- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators play As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 92 2-1. Instrument cluster Head-up display* * : If equipped The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield. System components Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed by the head-up display. A Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped) Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system: • Route guidance to destination • Street name • Compass (heading-up display) B Driving support system display area (→P.95) C Speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped) Displays the following items: • Speed limit of the current road (linked to the navigation system) (U.S.A. only) • RSA (Road Sign Assist) display (→P.247) D Outside temperature display area E Driving information display area LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster 93 Displays the following items: • Speedometer • Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174) F Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer display area (→P.96) G HUD (Head-up display) switch ■ Head-up display will operate when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ When using the head-up display ■ Street name display Only street names which are included in the map data will be displayed. ■ Outside temperature display ● When the ambient temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the low outside temperature indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds and the outside temperature display will turn off. In this case, the display will be displayed again when the outside temperature becomes approximately 41°F (5°C) or higher. ● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: • When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) • When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. ■ When using the head-up display ● Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle. NOTICE ■ Head-up display projector ● Do not place any drinks near the head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result. ● Do not place anything on or put stick- ers onto the head-up display projector. Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications. ● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector. Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Vehicle status information and indicators The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses. WARNING 94 2-1. Instrument cluster Using the head-up display Display angle ■ Enabling/disabling the head-up dis- Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display. Press the HUD switch. ■ Enabling/disabling of the head-up dis- play play If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the power switch is turned off then back to ON mode. ■ Display brightness The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on of the multi-information display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness. ■ Changing settings of the head-up display The following settings can be changed on of the multi-information display. (→P.481) Brightness and vertical position of the head-up display Select to adjust the brightness or vertical position of the head-up display. Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer Select to display the Hybrid System Indicator, tachometer or no content. Display content Select to enable/disable the following items: • Route guidance to destination/street name • Driving support system display* • Compass (heading-up display) • Audio system operation status * : Make sure to enable this display when using the driving support systems LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Head-up display automatic position adjustment If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically adjusted to the desired position. (→P.139) ■ When the 12-volt battery is discon- nected The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset. WARNING ■ Caution for changing settings of the head-up display As the hybrid system needs to be operating while changing the settings of the head-up display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. NOTICE ■ When changing the settings of the head-up display To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while the changing the settings of the head-up display. 2-1. Instrument cluster Driving support system display area Displays the operational status of the following systems: LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped) (→P.230) LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) (→P.240) Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the explanation of each system. Pop-up display Pop-up displays for the following systems will be displayed when necessary. ■ Driving support systems Displays a warning/suggestion/advice message or the operating state of a relevant system. PCS (Pre-Collision System) (→P.209, 220) FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped) (→P.227) Intuitive parking assist (→P.266) Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) (→P.286) Brake Override System (→P.159) Drive-Start Control (→P.159) Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) details, refer to the explanation of each system. ■ / icons These icons are linked to the multi-information display : Master warning icon Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.437) : Information icon Displayed when a suggestion pop-up display (→P.91) or advice pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display. ■ Warning message Some warning messages are displayed when necessary, according to certain conditions. Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. ■ Audio system operation status Displayed when an audio remote control switch on the steering wheel is operated. ■ Hands-free system status Displayed when the hands-free system is operated. ■ When a pop-up display is displayed When a pop-up display is displayed, a current display may no longer be displayed. In this case, the display will return after the pop-up display disappears. 2 Vehicle status information and indicators Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P.250) 95 96 2-1. Instrument cluster Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer ■ Hybrid System Indicator Energy monitor/consumption screen The state of the hybrid system can be viewed on the multi-information display and Center Display. The energy monitor or consumption screen can be displayed and operated on the side display. System components A Charge area B Hybrid Eco area C Eco area D Power area Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the meter (Hybrid System Indicator). For details, refer to P.78 or P.83. ■ Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. A Multi-information display B Center Display C Meter control switches D “MENU” button E Touchpad LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2-1. Instrument cluster displayed, select “Energy”. Energy monitor ■ Multi-information display ■ Center Display Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select menu screen. 97 on the If a screen other than “Energy Monitor” is Press the or switch and select or display. meter control , and then press to select the energy monitor When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor) Center Display Multi-information display Center Display Multi-information display When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine Center Display LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Multi-information display Vehicle status information and indicators When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor) 2 98 2-1. Instrument cluster When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) Center Display Multi-information display When there is no energy flow Center Display Multi-information display These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) status Center Display LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Low B High 99 2-1. Instrument cluster Multi-information display One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown. E Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started. F Elapsed time since the hybrid sys- tem was started. G Cruising range A Low These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. Consumption ■ History ■ Trip information Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select menu screen. on the If a screen other than “Trip Information” is displayed, select “Trip Information”. A Resetting the consumption data B Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes C Current fuel consumption D Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select menu screen. on the If a screen other than “History” is displayed, select “History”. A Best recorded fuel consumption B Latest fuel consumption C Previous fuel consumption record D Resetting the history data E Updating the latest fuel consump- tion data 2 Vehicle status information and indicators B High Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. 100 2-1. Instrument cluster The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Trip information (type A) The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. ■ Updating the history data Update the latest fuel consumption by selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel consumption again. ■ Resetting the data The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”. ■ Cruising range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Trip information (type B) Displays the cruising range, latest fuel consumption and the amount of time elapsed since the hybrid system was started. Using the side display Display the vehicle information on the side display (→P.317), and then select or to display the desired screen. The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions. Displays the average fuel consumption and regenerated energy for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as the cruising range. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ History Displays the average fuel consumption and highest fuel consumption. 2-1. Instrument cluster 101 Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Energy monitor Displays the hybrid system operation and energy recovery states. Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display. →P.88 2 Vehicle status information and indicators LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 102 2-1. Instrument cluster LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 103 Before driving 3 3-1. Key information . Keys .................................................104 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors...............................................108 Trunk................................................. 112 Smart access system with push-button start ...................... 119 3 3-3. Adjusting the seats Power rear seat........................... 135 Driving position memory ........ 139 Rear seat position memory.... 143 Head restraints............................ 144 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel............................. 147 Inside rear view mirror.............148 Outside rear view mirrors...... 149 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Power windows............................ 151 Moon roof ..................................... 153 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Before driving Front seats.....................................128 104 3-1. Key information 3-1.Key information Keys The keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. key does not operate properly. ● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc. ● To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it while pressing the lock release button. ● If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem. A Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (→P.119) • Operating the wireless remote control function (→P.106) B Mechanical keys C Key number plate D Card key (electronic key) (if equipped) Operating the smart access system with push-button start (→P.119) ■ Card key (if equipped) ● The card key is not waterproof. ● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the card LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When riding in an aircraft When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft. ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a half.) ● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be shown on the multi-information display when the hybrid system is stopped. 3-1. Key information ● To reduce key battery depletion when the ■ Replacing the battery →P.413 ■ Confirmation of the number of regis- tered keys The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. ■ If “A New Key has been Registered Contact Your Dealer for Details” is shown on the multi-information display This message will be displayed each time the driver’s door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately 10 days after a new electronic key has been registered. If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your Lexus dealer to check if an unknown electronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage ● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. ● Do not expose the keys to high tem- peratures for a long period of time. ● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. ● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. ● Do not disassemble the keys. 3 ● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key. ● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment. ■ Carrying the electronic key on your person Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly. ■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems →P.445 ■ When an electronic key is lost →P.444 ■ Handling the card key (if equipped) ● Do not apply excess force when insert- ing the mechanical key into the card key. Doing so may damage the card key. Before driving electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode. (→P.120) ● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P.413) • The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate. • The detection area becomes smaller. • The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: • TVs • Personal computers • Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers • Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones • Table lamps • Induction cookers 105 106 3-1. Key information NOTICE ● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key may stop working. If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery. A Locks the doors (→P.108) B Unlocks the doors (→P.108) ● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key. C Opens the windows and moon roof* (→P.108) D Opens the trunk (→P.115) ● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose. ● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery. Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly. ● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations: • The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys. E Sounds the alarm * : This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ Theft deterrent panic mode When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key. • The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil. • The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene. Wireless remote control The electronic keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control: Using the mechanical key To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-1. Key information 107 a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P.413) 3 Before driving ■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch off (→P.118) and lock the glove box (→P.344) as circumstances demand. Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. ■ If you lose your mechanical keys →P.444 ■ If a wrong key is used The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated from the internal mechanism. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 108 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors ■ Wireless remote control Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside ■ Smart access system with push-button start Carry the electronic key to enable this function. 1 Locks all the doors Check that the door is securely locked. 2 Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other door. Press and hold to open the windows and moon roof.* 1 Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip any passenger door handle to unlock all the doors.* Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. *: The door unlock settings can be changed. 2 Touch the lock sensor (indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors. Check that the door is securely locked. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) * : This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control. 1 Turn the power switch off. 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold , or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding . The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 3.) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Multi-information display/Beep Unlocking function Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door. Exterior: Beeps 3 times Holding any of the passenger door Interior: Pings once handles unlocks all the doors. the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. ■ When the doors cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle When the doors cannot be locked even if the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm. If you are wearing gloves, remove them. 3 Holding a door handle unlocks all the doors. Interior: Pings once To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P.68) ■ Impact detection door lock release sys- tem In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating. ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Open door warning buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Setting the alarm Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P.68) ■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control →P.120 ■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P.445) Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P.413) ■ If the 12-volt battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the mechanical key. (→P.445) ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. Before driving Exterior: Beeps twice 109 110 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk (→P.481) WARNING ■ To prevent an accident Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside ■ Door lock switches (to lock/unlock) Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked. ● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. 1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks all the doors ● Set the rear door child-protector locks ■ Inside lock buttons (to lock) when children are seated in the rear seats. ■ When opening or closing a door Push down the inside lock button to lock the door. Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement. ■ Vehicle height control precautions (vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension) In the following situations, make sure to check the safety of the area around the vehicle, as the vehicle height may change and part of someone’s body may be caught in the vehicle, possibly causing injury or the vehicle may be damaged. ■ Inside door handles (to unlock) For the front doors Pull the handle to unlock and open the door. ● When opening a door When the door is unlocked, the inside lock button will pop up. ● When unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For the rear doors Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull the handle a second time to open the door. 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk When the door is unlocked, the inside lock button will pop up. ■ Locking the front doors from the outside 111 WARNING ■ Door closer In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the door easy closer begins to operate. If the child-protector lock is set, the door closer will not stop during operation even if an attempt is made to open the door from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the door. Failure to do so may result in serious injury. without a key 1 Push down the inside lock button. 2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. 3 Before driving ■ Door closer In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. ● The door closer will operate regardless of the power switch mode. ● The door closer will not function if the door has been closed while pulling the inside or outside door handle. ● The door can be opened by pulling the inside or outside door handle, even when the door closer is operating (except when the lock button is in the lock position or the child-protector lock is set). ● A motor sound may be heard for several seconds after the door closer closes the door. This does not indicate a malfunction. NOTICE ■ To prevent door closer malfunction Do not frequently repeat opening and closing of doors, or apply excessive force to a door while the door closer is operating. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. ■ Open door warning buzzer If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h). The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on the multi-information display. 1 Unlock LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 112 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 2 Lock These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or canceled: For instructions on customizing, refer to P.481. Function Speed linked door locking function Operation All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. All doors are automatiShift position cally locked when the linked door lock- shift position is shifted ing function to a position other than P. Shift position linked door unlocking function All doors are automatically unlocked when the shift position is shifted to P. Driver’s door linked door unlocking function All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened within approximately 45 seconds after turning the power switch off. Trunk The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control. The trunk can be closed using the trunk closer. WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Before driving ● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident. ● Do not allow children to play in the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries. ● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid. ■ Important points while driving Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. ■ Using the trunk Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk WARNING ● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened. ● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close. ● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind. not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. ● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught. ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened. ■ Trunk easy closer In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the trunk easy closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries. ■ Power trunk opener and closer Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and closer. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. ● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught. ● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close. ● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the trunk lid may open or close suddenly. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Before driving ● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is 113 114 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk WARNING ● On an incline, the trunk lid may sud- denly shut after it opens automatically. Make sure the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. ● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk lid may suddenly shut, causing an accident. • When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle • When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic operation ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the trunk lid may suddenly shut again after it is opened. ■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if equipped) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. ● Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot. When operating the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipe. ● Do not operate the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid if there is little space under the rear bumper. ■ Jam protection function Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause serious injury. ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid. ● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else. NOTICE ■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunc- tions Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating. ■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer ● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the trunk lid may cause a malfunction. ● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and closer is operating. Opening/closing the trunk ■ Trunk opener switch Press the trunk opener switch. The trunk lid will fully open. 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 115 If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving. ■ Smart access system with push-button start While carrying the electronic key, press the button. The trunk lid will fully open. When all the doors are unlocked using one of the following methods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key: Entry function equipped) 1 While carrying an electronic key, stand slightly away from the vehicle, move a foot under the center of the rear bumper and then pull it back. The trunk lid will not start operating while a foot is detected under the rear bumper. If another electronic key for your vehicle is in the vehicle, it may take slightly longer than normal for the trunk lid to start operating. Wireless remote control Door lock switches Automatic door unlocking system Mechanical key 2 A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will fully open/close. ■ Wireless remote control Press and hold the switch. A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will fully open. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If a foot is moved under the rear bumper while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving. If a foot is moved under the rear bumper while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid will open. ■ Trunk closer switch Press the trunk closer switch. 3 Before driving If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving. ■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if 116 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will fully close. Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is closing opens the trunk lid again. ■ Trunk grip Using the trunk grip, pull down the trunk lid without applying sideways force and push the trunk lid down from the outside to close it. open the trunk to the half open position or more and then close it. ■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside ● When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid. ● If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle. ● If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk. ● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener. ■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating ■ Trunk lid light/trunk light ● The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. ● If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on when the power switch is turned off, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■ Trunk easy closer In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. ● The trunk easy closer will operate regardless of the power switch mode. ● If the trunk easy closer does not operate, LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) conditions (if equipped) The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) is enabled and the power switch is turned off. ■ Overload protection function The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk lid. ■ Fall-down protection function While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down. ■ Jam protection function While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if something gets caught. 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid to the side. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. ■ Using the mechanical key ■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. (→P.446) Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P.413) ■ Situations in which the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally (if equipped) In the following situations, the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally. To prevent unintentional operation, do not leave the electronic key in the trunk and keep it out of the effective range (detection area) or disable the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor). ● When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain ● When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper ● When a small animal or small object, such as a ball, moves under the rear bumper ● When an object is moved from under the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) rear bumper ● When snow, etc. is removed from under the rear bumper ● If someone is swinging their legs while sitting on the rear bumper ● If the legs or another part of someone’s body contacts the rear bumper while passing by the vehicle ● When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light ● When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When the vehicle is parked in a place where objects, such as grass, move near the rear bumper ● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear bumper ● If accessories or a vehicle cover is installed/removed near the rear bumper ● When the vehicle is being towed ■ Situations in which the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly (if equipped) ● In the following situations, the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly: • If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a foot or is touched for a while Make sure not to touch the rear bumper with a foot when operating the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid. If the rear bumper has been touched for a while, wait for a short time before attempting to operate the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid again. • When an external radio wave source interferes with the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle (→P.120) • When the vehicle is parked near an elec- 3 Before driving The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (→P.446) If the trunk is unlocked using the mechanical key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy closer will not be operational. To return them to an operational state, fully close the trunk lid by hand. 117 118 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk trical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light • When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise • When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain • When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to the rear bumper • When the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move under the rear bumper, such as grass • When an accessory is installed to the rear bumper Make sure to disable the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) if an accessory is installed to the rear bumper. ● The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid will not operate in the following situations: • When an electronic key is not carried • When an electronic key is not within the effective range (detection area) ■ Open door warning buzzer →P.111 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) Luggage security system The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft. Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A On B Off The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control, entry function or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid. ■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant →P.107 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key. Locks and unlocks the doors (→P.108) Opens the trunk (→P.115) ■ Antenna location ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) A When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) B When opening the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button. C When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. ■ Alarms and warning messages A Antennas outside the cabin B Antennas inside the cabin C Antenna inside the trunk D Antenna outside the trunk LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) An alarm sounds and warning messages are displayed on the multi-information display to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (→P.437) When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows. ● When an exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds 3 Before driving Starts the hybrid system (→P.168) 119 120 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Situation Correction procedure Close all of the An attempt was made to doors and lock lock the vehicle while a the doors door was open. again. The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked. Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid. ● When an interior alarm sounds continu- ously Situation Correction procedure The power switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s Turn the power switch off and door was open (The close the driver’s door was opened when the power switch driver’s door. was in ACCESSORY mode). The power switch was turned off while the driver’s door was open. take some time to unlock the doors. • The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer. • The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer. ● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors. ■ Turning an electronic key to bat- tery-saving mode When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves. Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons. Close the driver’s door. ■ If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is shown on the multi-information display An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart access system with pushbutton start while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again. ■ Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. ● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P.445) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases: • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the center of the rear bumper when the trunk is opened. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) modes are changed. ● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle. ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle. ● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window. ● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. ● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given. ● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: • Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) 3 Before driving airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device ● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby ● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window ● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices ● When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted. 121 122 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk • Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P.120) ● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors. ● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again. ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped. ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods ● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance. ● Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery depletion. (→P.120) ■ To operate the system properly ● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.) ● Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk. The key confinement prevention function LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) may not operate, depending on the location of the key (the inside edge of the Trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (→P.116) ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: →P.445 ● Starting the hybrid system: →P.446 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) ■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting ● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P.108, 115, 445) ● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: →P.446 ● Stopping the hybrid system: →P.170 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 123 ■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico 3 Before driving LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 124 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 125 For vehicles sold in Canada 3 Before driving LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 126 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk 127 WARNING ■ Caution regarding interference with ● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Before driving electronic devices ● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (→P.119) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. 128 3-3. Adjusting the seats 3-3.Adjusting the seats Front seats WARNING ■ When adjusting the seat position ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. ● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck. ■ Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward If the outside rear view mirror is difficult to see, due to the position of the front passenger’s seat, move the front passenger’s seat to an appropriate position. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat or rear seat Before operating the front passenger’s seat, make sure that there is no luggage or any other objects on the seat or in the footwell that could prevent its operation. Such items may result in excess force being applied, causing damage to the seat and/or the luggage. Adjustment procedure ■ Seat adjustment switches ■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat or rear seat Do not operate the front passenger’s seat when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the front passenger’s seat while the seat is being operated or when the head restraint is being folded. The front passenger may catch their legs between the instrument panel and seat, or the head restraint may interfere with their head, resulting in injury. A Seat position adjustment switch B Seatback angle adjustment switch C Seat cushion (front) angle adjust- ment switch D Vertical height adjustment switch LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats E Lumbar support adjustment switch F Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped) ■ Center Display 1 Press the seat switch. 129 G Hip support adjustment (if equipped) 4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons. The seat will move while a button is selected. ■ When adjusting the front seats While adjusting a front seat, to avoid contact with the ceiling, instrument panel or rear seats, the operation of the seat may be restricted or parts of the seat other than that being adjusted may move. ■ Operation after the power switch is 3 Select the button for the desired adjustment. ■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear displays (if equipped) When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the rear display will be adjusted automatically to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the rear display from the rear seat. A Head restraint adjustment (→P.144) B Shoulder bolster adjustment (if equipped) C Lumbar support adjustment D Pelvic support adjustment E Seatback side bolster adjustment (if equipped) F Seat cushion side bolster adjust- ment (if equipped) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen- ger seats →P.210, 220 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) 3 Before driving 2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or “Passenger Seat Adjustment”. turned off After a certain time elapses after the power switch is turned off, the following parts of the front seats will move to their neutral positions. ● Shoulder bolster (if equipped) ● Lumbar support ● Pelvic support ● Seatback side bolster (if equipped) ● Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped) ● Hip support (if equipped) 130 3-3. Adjusting the seats Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat ■ Using the Center Display (vehicles with a foldable head restraint) 1 Press the seat switch. ■ Using the driver’s seat adjustment switches to adjust the front passenger’s seat (front passenger mode) The mode of the driver’s seat adjustment switches can be changed to adjust the front passenger’s seat. 1 Press the mode change button on the driver’s side door. The indicator A will illuminate when front passenger mode is selected. 2 Press the sub function button of the Remote Touch. (→P.314) 3 Select the button for the desired operation. 2 Using the seat adjustment switches on the driver’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat. To cancel front passenger mode, press the mode change button again. Front passenger mode will be canceled automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment switches are not operated for approximately 30 seconds. A Moves the front passenger’s seat forward and folds the seatback and head restraint forward B Moves the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback and head restraint to the upright position If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s seat is not in the upright position, it will move to the upright position before the front passenger’s seat moves to its upright position. To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, select the A or B button or press the seat switch. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Operating the foldable head restraint LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ger mode: • The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off. • The front passenger’s seat position is moved to a position forward of the neutral position. ■ Operating the foldable head restraint using the front passenger’s seat adjustment switches (if equipped) When the front passenger’s head restraint is folded forward and the front passenger’s door is open, if the front passenger’s seat adjustment switches are used to move the seat backward or recline the seatback, the head restraint will move to the upright position automatically when the switch is released. To stop the operation of the front passenger’s head restraint part-way, perform any of the following operations: ● Operate any front passenger’s seat adjustment switch. The head restraint will stop when the seat position adjustment switch or seatback angle adjustment switch is operated to move the seat backward or recline the seatback, and will resume operating when the switch is released. ● Press the “SET” button. ● Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button. ● Press the seat switch. ■ Operation of the front passenger’s seat using the Center Display will be canceled when (vehicles with a foldable head restraint) In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the Center Display: ● The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off. ● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. 3 Before driving using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode (if equipped) ● When the front passenger’s seatback angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode, the front passenger’s head restraint will operate automatically as follows: • When the front passenger’s seatback is moved forward to the upright position, the head restraint will lower and fold forward when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released. • When the front passenger’s seatback is moved backward to the upright position, the head restraint will move to the upright position when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released. ● If any of the following conditions are met, the front passenger’s head restraint will not fold forward even though the front passenger’s seatback angle is being adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode: • The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off. • The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. • The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened. • The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.) • The front passenger’s seat is not in the lowest position. • The front passenger’s seat seat cushion (front) is not in the lowest position. • The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is extended (if equipped). ● If either of the following conditions is met, the front passenger’s head restraint will not return to the upright position even though the front passenger’s seatback angle is being adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passen- 131 132 3-3. Adjusting the seats ● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas- tened. ● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.) When the operating conditions are not met, the buttons will be grayed out. ■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward By reclining the front passenger’s seat seatback, the forward view of the rear passenger can be improved. Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (vehicles without power rear seat) A Move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward. On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also fold forward. B Move the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback to the upright position. 1 Press and hold to move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward. 2 Press and hold to move the front passenger’s seat backward and move the seatback to the upright position. Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (vehicles with power rear seat) ■ Automatic operation 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 2 Touch the button for the desired operation. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s seat is not in the upright position, it will move to the upright position before the front passenger’s seat moves to its previous position. On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also move to the upright position. To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, touch “STOP”. ■ Manual operation 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 2 Touch “Right” 3-3. Adjusting the seats 3 Touch the button for the desired operation. 133 closed or the power switch is turned off. ● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas- tened. ● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.) ■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward →P.132 Front seat refresh system (if equipped) A Touch and hold to move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward. B Touch and hold to move the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback to the upright position. On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also move to the upright position. ■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the Rear Multi Operation Panel: ● The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off. ● The rear seat belt is not fastened and weight is not detected on the rear seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Refresh” or “Passenger Seat Refresh”. 3 Select the desired mode. “Centripetal” Applies pressure sequentially from the front of the seat cushion to top of the seatback “Centrifugal” Applies pressure sequentially from the top of the seatback to the front of the seat cushion “Upper Body” 3 Before driving On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also fold forward. Pneumatic chambers built into the front seat apply pressure to the occupant’s body at different modes and intensities. 1 Press the seat switch. 134 3-3. Adjusting the seats Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the seatback “Lower Body” Applies pressure sequentially from the front to the back of the seat cushion “Lumbar” ■ Using the refresh system ● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requiring rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use. ● Do not allow children to use the refresh function. Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the lumbar area of the seatback ● Do not use immediately after consum- 4 Select the desired intensity and then confirm the setting. ● If you feel sick while using the refresh The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps. To stop the operation select “Stop”. If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the front seat refresh system for that seat. ■ Refresh system ● Operating conditions • The power switch is in ON mode. • The temperature in the cabin is not extremely high. • For the front passenger’s seat: The weight of an occupant is detected on the front passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● Automatic stop function • The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes. • If the power easy access system begins operating, the front seat refresh system will stop. WARNING ■ Important points while driving Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh system while driving. Using it may affect your ability to control the vehicle, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ing a meal or alcohol, or for an extended period of time. function, immediately discontinue use. 3-3. Adjusting the seats Power rear seat* * : If equipped WARNING ■ When adjusting the seat position ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● When adjusting the rear seat with an ottoman, make sure there is sufficient space so that a foot does not get caught between the ottoman and front passenger seat. (If equipped) system: When the rear seat is moving to the Entertainment Mode position, do not allow hands near the rear display. Otherwise, a hand or finger may be caught, possibly causing injury. ■ Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ■ Using the ottoman (if equipped) ● Do not sit on the ottoman. If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat belt cannot be fitted properly, and they may be thrown from the seat, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● When getting in or out of the vehicle, retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is not retracted, it may cause a fall, resulting in injury. ● Do not operate the ottoman when the vehicle is moving. ● Do not allow anyone to put their hands or feet under the rear seat when stowing the ottoman. NOTICE ■ To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if equipped) ● Do not place any objects in the rear seat footwell that could prevent the operation of the ottoman. ● Do not place heavy luggage on the ottoman. ● Do not place any objects under the ottoman while it is raised for use. These objects may interfere with the ottoman being folded, causing damage to the ottoman or the objects themselves. ■ To prevent a rear display malfunction (if equipped) Do not attempt to move the rear display by hand, as doing so may damage the rear display. Adjustment procedure ■ Manual operation 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 2 Touch “Left” or “Right”. 3 Before driving ● Vehicle with rear seat entertainment 135 136 3-3. Adjusting the seats 3 Select the button for the desired adjustment. met, the preset buttons will be grayed out. A Moves the left-hand rear seat to the A Head restraint adjustment (→P.144) B Shoulder bolster adjustment C Lumbar/pelvic support adjustment D Seatback angle adjustment E Seat cushion (front) angle adjust- ment F Ottoman adjustment (if equipped) 4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons. The seat will move while a button is touched. ■ Automatic operation The seat can be moved to preset positions. 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 2 Touch the desired preset button. When the operating conditions are not upright position (Business Mode) B Moves the right-hand rear seat to the upright position (Business Mode) C Moves the rear seat with an otto- man to a slightly reclined position (Entertainment Mode) (if equipped) Vehicle without rear seat entertainment system: Moves the front passenger’s seat forward. Vehicle with rear seat entertainment system: Moves the front passenger’s seat and rear display to allow the rear display to be comfortably viewed. D Moves the rear seat with an otto- man to a deeply reclined position (Relaxation Mode) (if equipped) Moves the front passenger’s seat forward and folds the seatback and head restraint forward. To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, touch “STOP”. ■ Adjustment of the rear seat When a rear seat is close to a front seat, the operation of the rear seat may be restricted. ■ Operating conditions of Business Mode When the rear seat belt is not fastened and LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats weight is not detected on the rear seat, Business Mode cannot be selected. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ■ The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be ● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas- tened. ● The front passenger’s door is open. ■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward →P.132 ■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear displays (if equipped) When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the rear display will be adjusted automatically to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the rear display from the rear seat. ■ Operation after the power switch is turned off After a certain time elapses after the power switch is turned off, the following parts of the rear seats will move to their neutral positions. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Shoulder bolster ● Lumbar/pelvic support ■ Seat return function linked to the door opening operation The rear seat will return to the upright position automatically when the rear door is opened for easier entry and exit of the vehicle. For the rear seat with an ottoman (if equipped): When the rear door on the side with the rear seat with an ottoman is opened, the seatback of the rear seat with an ottoman will move to a more upright position. The seatback will move to the upright position after the door is closed and the system determines that the rear passenger has exited. However, if the armrest is stowed, the rear seat will not move. ■ Shift-linked rear seat reclining function When the shift position is shifted from P, to enhance rear visibility for the driver, the rear seats will recline slightly. However, the shift-linked rear seat reclining function will not operate in the following situations: ● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on a rear seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● A rear seat belt is fastened. ● A rear door is open. ● The armrest is stowed. When a front seat is close to a rear seat, the rear seats may not operate or the range of movement may be restricted. ■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen- ger seats →P.210, 220 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) 3 Before driving moved to Entertainment Mode/Relaxation Mode when (if equipped) In the following situations, Entertainment Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be selected: ● The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off. ● The rear seat belt is not fastened and weight is not detected on the rear seat. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. 137 138 3-3. Adjusting the seats Returning the rear seat from the front seats 1 Press the seat switch. WARNING ■ When returning the rear seats to the neutral position To avoid injuring the rear passengers, wait until they have gotten out of the vehicle before operating the switch. Rear seat relaxation system (if equipped) 2 Press the sub function button of the Remote Touch. (→P.314) 3 Select A . The rear seat will move to the upright position. ■ Operation of the rear seats from the front seats In the following situations, the rear seats cannot be operated from the front seats. ● When the armrest is stowed and weight of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is detected on a rear seat Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● When the armrest is stowed and a rear seat belt is fastened. The rear seat relaxation system utilizes pneumatic chambers and dedicated heaters, and applies pressure to the occupant’s body at different modes and intensities. To display the rear seat relaxation system screen, display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Relaxation”. A Touch to select the desired rear seat. B Touch to select the desired mode. When a button is touched, operation will begin. C Touch to adjust the intensity. The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps. D Touch to turn the spot heaters on/off. E Touch to stop the operation. If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-3. Adjusting the seats rear seat relaxation system for that seat. ■ Relaxation system ● Operating conditions • The power switch is in ON mode. • The temperature in the cabin is not extremely high. • The weight of an occupant is detected on the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● Automatic stop function WARNING ■ Using the relaxation system ● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requiring rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use. ● Do not allow children to use the relax- ation function. ● Do not use immediately after consum- ing a meal or alcohol, or for an extended period of time. ● If you feel sick while using the relax- ation function, immediately discontinue use. Driving position memory This feature automatically adjusts the positions of the front seats, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and head-up display (if equipped) to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences. Up to 3 different driving positions can be recorded. Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your preferred driving position. Power easy access system The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily. Driver’s seat When all of the following have been performed, the seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily. • The shift position has been shifted to P. • The power switch has been turned off. • The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened. When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode (→P.130), the seat and steering wheel will not move. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Before driving • The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes. • If the door for a seat that the relaxation system is currently being used is opened, the relaxation system will stop operating. 139 140 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Operation of the power easy access sys- On vehicles with adjustable seat cushion side bolsters, when the driver’s door is opened with the power switch off, the seat cushion side bolsters will lower if they are in the default position. When any of the following has been performed, the seat and steering wheel automatically return to their original positions. • The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode. • The driver’s seat belt has been fastened. Front passenger’s seat If all of the following have been performed while the vehicle is stopped, the lumbar support, pelvic support, shoulder bolster (if equipped), seatback side bolster (if equipped), and hip support (if equipped) will be moved to their default position. On vehicles with adjustable seat cushion side bolsters, the seat cushion side bolsters will lower. • The passenger’s seat belt has been unfastened. • The front passenger’s door is opened. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) tem ● When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already in the rearmost or uppermost position or close to the rear seat. ● If the seat position is adjusted during power easy access system operation, the automatic operation will stop. (The seat will change to manual operation.) ● If the seat position is adjusted during or after the power easy access system operation when the driver is exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system will not operate when entering the vehicle. ■ Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if equipped) If the seat cushion side bolsters have been lowered, when the front door is closed, the seat cushion side bolsters will move to their default position. If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion side bolsters are moving to the default position, their movement will be temporarily suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters will move to the default position after a certain amount of time.) ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) Recording a driving position into memory 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Check that the shift position is in P. 3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and head-up display (if equipped) to the desired positions. 4 While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the “SET” 3-3. Adjusting the seats button is pressed, press button “1”, “2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode (→P.130), the position of the driver’s seat cannot be registered. 141 3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds. When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode (→P.130), a driving position cannot be recalled. 3 ■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled. WARNING ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. Recalling a driving position 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Check that the shift position is in P. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) part-way through Perform any of the following operations: ● Press the “SET” button. ● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Press the mode change button. ● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall). ● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall). ■ Recalling a driving position If a driving position is recalled, the movement of the front seat may be stopped partway if the seat moves close to the rear seat. If a rear passenger is determined to be in the vehicle, the rearward movement of the front seat may be stopped partway to ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger. ■ Recalling the front passenger’s seat position (vehicles with a rear seat with an ottoman) If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended, the front passenger’s seat position cannot be recalled. Before driving To record the position of the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired position and perform step 4 using the buttons on the front passenger’s side. ■ To stop the position recall operation 142 3-3. Adjusting the seats ■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off Driver’s seat: Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Front passenger’s seat: Recorded seat positions can be recalled up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s door is opened. Registering/canceling/recall a driving position to an electronic key (including a card key) (memory recall function) ■ Registering procedure Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following: Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly. 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Check that the shift position is in P. 3 Recall the driving position that you want to record. 4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds. If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approxi- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) mately 3 seconds. ■ Cancelation procedure Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly. 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Check that the shift position is in P. 3 While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice. If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds. ■ Recall procedure 1 Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control. The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering wheel and head-up display [if equipped]). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehi- 3-3. Adjusting the seats cle easier. If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move. 2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode, or fasten a seat belt. The seat, steering wheel and head-up display (if equipped) will move to the recorded position. ■ Recalling the driving position using the 143 Rear seat position memory* * : If equipped The rear seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. Recording a position into memory 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. ■ Customization 5 Touch “1” or “2”. Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) If the preset is being used, the previously recorded seat position will be overwritten. 2 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 3 Touch “Left” or “Right”. 4 Adjust the rear seat to the desired position and then touch “Set Memory”. ■ In order to correctly use the position memory function If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled. WARNING ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment so that the rear passengers do not strike the front seats. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Before driving memory recall function ● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried. ● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set. 144 3-3. Adjusting the seats Recalling the memorized position 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. 3 Touch “1” or “2”. When the operating conditions are not met, the buttons will be grayed out. To stop the operation touch “STOP”. If the seat is adjusted while a memorized position is being recalled, the automatic operation will stop. (The seat will change to manual operation.) Head restraints Head restraints are provided for all seats. Vehicles with power rear seat: The head restraint for the rear center seat is integrated into the seatback and cannot be adjusted. WARNING ■ Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ■ Operating condition The weight of an occupant is detected on the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened. Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the power switch is turned off. ● Adjust the head restraints to the cor- rect position at all times. ● Manual type: After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. ■ Recalling a rear seat position If a memorized rear seat position is recalled, the seat may stop part-way to ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger. ■ Recalling the ottoman position (if equipped) When a seat position is recalled, the ottoman will not raise or extend. The ottoman position can only be recalled if the memorized position is lower and shorter than the current position. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Adjusting a head restraint vertically and horizontally (power head restraints) Front seats 1 Press the seat switch. 3-3. Adjusting the seats 2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or “Passenger Seat Adjustment”. 3 Select A then the desired adjustment button B , C , D , or E to adjust the head restraint. 145 B Up C Backward D Down E Forward The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is touched. Adjusting a head restraint vertically (manual head restraints) 3 Before driving B Up C Backward D Down E Forward 1 Up The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is selected. Pull the head restraints up. Rear seats 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.318) and then touch “Seat”. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button A . 2 Touch “Left” or “Right”. 3 Touch A then the desired adjustment button B , C , D , or E to adjust the head restraint. 2 Down ■ Front seat head restraints (power head restraints) Depending on the position of the front seat, the front head restraint may not be able to be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceiling. ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 146 3-3. Adjusting the seats adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints (manual head restraints) Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. Adjusting the side supports (if equipped) Push the sides of the head restraint. Removing the head restraints (manual head restraints) Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button A . ■ Removing the head restraints (power head restraints) For removal and installation of the head restraint, contact your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Installing the head restraints (manual head restraints) Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button A when lowering the head restraint. 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors 147 3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel Adjustment procedure Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions: WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Sounding the horn Press on or close to the mark. 3 Up Down Toward the driver Away from the driver ■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode*. *: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of power switch mode. ■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (→P.139) ■ Power easy access system The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with power switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P.139) ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Before driving 1 2 3 4 148 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Inside rear view mirror The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view. Adjusting the height of rear view mirror When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator A illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode. Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator A also turns off.) The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Anti-glare function Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced. Turn the automatic anti-glare function mode on/off LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors Outside rear view mirrors 149 2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch. The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view. WARNING ■ Important points while driving Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. Adjustment procedure 1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch. The indicator comes on. B Right C Down D Left ■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. ■ Defogging the mirrors The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P.324) ■ Auto anti-glare function When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P.148) ■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror A Left angle A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P.139) B Right ■ Linked mirror function when reversing Pressing the same switch again will put the switch in neutral. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” 3 Before driving ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded. A Up 150 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors nor “R”. To set the mirror angle used when the vehicle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position with the shift position in R. The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift position is shifted to R from next time. The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift position in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change. When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing. locking/unlocking of the doors. Press the “AUTO” switch to set automatic mode. The indicator A will come on. Pressing the switch once more will return to manual mode. WARNING ■ When the mirror defoggers are oper- ating Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. Folding and extending the mirrors ■ Using the switch Press the switch to fold the mirrors. Press it again to extend them to the original position. ■ When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals The automatic folding/extending mirror function will return to off as default. To turn the function on, press the switch again to select on. ■ Using automatic mode in cold weather When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this case, remove any ice and snow from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mirror by hand. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING ■ When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror. ■ Setting automatic mode Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof 151 Power windows mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. Opening and closing the power windows ■ Jam protection function 3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows: If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly. ■ Catch protection function If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped. ■ When the side window cannot be 2 One-touch closing* 3 Opening 4 One-touch opening* * : To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction. ■ The power windows can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ When the driver’s power window switch is used to open a rear power window (vehicles with rear door sunshades) If a rear door sunshade is extended or being extended when the driver’s power window switch is pushed, only the rear door sunshade will be retracted. To open the rear power window from the driver’s seat, push the driver’s power window switch again. ■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Before driving 1 Closing opened or closed When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the side window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door. ● Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the side window can be opened and closed. ● If the side window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization. 1 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the side window. 3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more. 4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the side window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more. 5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and 152 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more. 6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the side window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more. If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Door lock linked window operation ● The power windows can be opened and * closed using the mechanical key. (→P.446) ● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P.108) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ Power windows open warning buzzer A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ Closing the windows ● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P.153) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Check to make sure that all passen- gers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ● When using the wireless remote con- trol or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window. ● When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident. ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window. ■ Catch protection function ● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function. 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof WARNING ● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or closing caught in the window. Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch) 153 Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down. Operating the moon roof ■ Opening and closing This function can be used to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. 3 Press the switch. The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver’s switch even if the lock switch is on. 1 Opens the moon roof* The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens. 2 Closes the moon roof* * : Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway. ■ Tilting up and down ■ The power windows can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ When the 12-volt battery is discon- nected The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. 1 Tilts the moon roof up* 2 Tilts the moon roof down* *: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway. Before driving The indicator A will come on and the passenger windows will be locked. 154 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof ■ The moon roof can be operated when rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. The power switch is in ON mode. ■ If the moon roof does not move normally ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. ■ Door lock linked moon roof operation ● The moon roof can be opened and If the moon roof does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure. 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.* The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up position. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt down, and stop at the fully closed position. 3 Confirm that the moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch. * : If you release the switch while the moon roof is moving, perform the procedure again from the beginning. If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the moon roof still does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. closed using the mechanical key.* (→P.446) ● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P.108) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ Moon roof open warning buzzer ■ When the moon roof does not close nor- Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) mally Perform the following procedure: 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.* The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will close again and stop at the completely closed position. 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. *: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning. If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure cor- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open. ■ Customization WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■ Opening the moon roof ● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. ● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof WARNING ■ Opening and closing the moon roof ● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof. ● Check to make sure that all passen- gers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. 155 ■ Jam protection function ● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the moon roof switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught. 3 Before driving ● When using the wireless remote con- trol or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof. ● When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 156 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 157 Driving 4-1. Before driving . Driving the vehicle.....................158 Cargo and luggage................... 164 Vehicle load limits...................... 166 Trailer towing............................... 166 Dinghy towing ............................. 167 4-2. Driving procedures 4 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) ........................................................227 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .... 230 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) ....................................................... 240 RSA (Road Sign Assist).......... 247 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range...................... 250 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 260 EV drive mode ............................ 172 Hybrid transmission .................. 174 PKSA (Parking Support Alert) ....................................................... 265 Turn signal lever..........................180 Intuitive parking assist............. 266 Parking brake ............................... 181 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function....................................... 273 Brake Hold....................................183 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch.........................185 AHB (Automatic High Beam) .........................................................188 Windshield wipers and washer .........................................................190 4-4. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap...... 194 4-5. Using the driving support systems Lexus Safety System+A........... 196 Lexus Safety System+ .............203 PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) .......................................209 PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+) ........................................................220 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function....................................... 277 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) .......................................................280 Parking Support Brake function (static objects)......................... 286 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) ....... 291 Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) .................. 295 Driving mode select switch .. 298 Electronically modulated air suspension....................................... 299 Driving assist systems.............. 302 4-6. Driving tips Hybrid vehicle driving tips .... 307 Winter driving tips....................309 4 Driving Power (ignition) switch ............168 158 4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle 5 Slowly release the brake pedal. The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving: 6 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. 4-1.Before driving Driving procedure ■ Starting the hybrid system →P.168 ■ Driving 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift position to D. (→P.174) Check that the shift position indicator shows D. 2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. (→P.181) 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping 1 With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal. 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift position to P. (→P.176) ■ Parking the vehicle 1 With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely. 2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake. (→P.181) 3 Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176) 4 Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. ■ Starting off on a steep uphill 1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift position to D. Hill-start assist control will operate. (→P.303) 2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal. 3 Release the parking brake. ■ For fuel-efficient driving Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. (→P.307) ■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. ■ Engine speed while driving In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. ● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill ● When the accelerator pedal is released 4-1. Before driving ● When the brake pedal is depressed ■ Restraining the hybrid system output (Brake Override System) ● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the hybrid system output may be restrained. ● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating. ■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control) ● When the following unusual operation is • *: ● While Drive-Start Control is being acti- vated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC (→P.304) to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow. ■ Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended: ● For the first 186 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ● For the first 621 miles (1000 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. ■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation. ■ Brake pads and discs (F SPORT models) The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.). ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P.461) WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When starting the vehicle Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. 4 Driving • performed, the hybrid system output may be restrained. When the shift position is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D*, or P to R* (D includes M) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instruction. When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse. Depending on the situation, the shift position may not be changed. 159 160 4-1. Before driving WARNING • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement. Even with the vehicle proximity notification system activate, drive with care as pedestrians in the vicinity may still not notice the vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy. ● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby. ● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P.420 ● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P.174) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. ■ When driving on slippery road sur- faces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle. ● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected. ■ When shifting the shift position ● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while a forward driving position is selected, or roll forward while the shift position is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle. 4-1. Before driving WARNING ● Do not shift the shift position to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift position to a driv- ing position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Changing the shift position to N while ● Be careful not to change the shift posi- tion with the accelerator pedal depressed. Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. After changing the shift position, make sure to confirm the current shift position displayed on the shift position indicator inside the meter. ■ Brake pad wear If any of the following situations occurs, have the brake pads visually checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ● If the thickness of the brake pads exceeds the brake pad wear limit when visually checking all four brake pads (for the brake pad wear limit, refer to P.465) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display (only the right-side pads can be detected) Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. F SPORT models: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. If the shift position is any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. ● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the “READY” indicator is illuminated, and apply the parking brake as necessary. ● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. ● Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby. 4 Driving the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged. 161 162 4-1. Before driving WARNING ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components. ● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. ● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle. ● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire. ● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift position to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the “READY” indicator is illuminated. ● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the “READY” indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ● The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ■ If the vehicle becomes stuck Do not spin the wheels excessively when a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident. 4-1. Before driving NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the hybrid system output. ● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ When parking the vehicle Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor. ● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. ■ If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehi- cle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations. ● The vehicle will lean abnormally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P.442) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following: ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmission, transfer (AWD models), differential, etc. ● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. If the shift control system is damaged by flooding, it may not be possible to shift the shift position to P, or from P to other positions. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ When parking the vehicle Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. 4 Driving ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in 163 164 4-1. Before driving Cargo and luggage gage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load: (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P.166) Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit — Calculation formula for your vehicle (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and lug- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Cargo capacity B Total load capacity (vehicle capac- ity weight) (→P.460) When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows: B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg) *1 : A =Weight of people *2 : B =Total load capacity 4-1. Before driving *3 : C =Available cargo and luggage load In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows: C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4 : D =Additional weight of people *5: E =Available cargo and luggage load WARNING ■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk: ● Receptacles containing gasoline ● Aerosol cans ■ Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations. • At the feet of the driver • On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • On the package tray • On the instrument panel • On the dashboard • In front of the Center Display ● Secure all items in the occupant com- partment. ■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. 4 Driving As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. 165 166 4-1. Before driving Vehicle load limits Trailer towing Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers. Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P.460 Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Seating capacity:5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. Towing capacity Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P.408) WARNING ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-1. Before driving 167 Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE 4 ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehi- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving cle Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground. 168 4-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch 4 Check that the “READY” indicator is illuminated. Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes. The vehicle cannot be driven if the “READY” indicator is off. 4-2.Driving procedures Starting the hybrid system 1 Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.181) The parking brake indicator will come on. 2 Firmly depress the brake pedal. and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started. When the shift position is N, the hybrid system cannot start. Shift the shift position to P when starting the hybrid system. (→P.176) 3 Press the power switch shortly and firmly. When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. If the “READY” indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the “READY” indicator is illuminated. The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode. ■ Power switch illumination According to the situation, the power switch illumination operates as follows. ● When a door is opened, or the power switch mode is changed from ACCESSORY or ON mode to off, the power switch illumination slowly blinks. ● When depressing the brake pedal with carrying the electronic key on your person, the power switch illumination rapidly blinks. ● When the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the power switch illumination illuminates. ■ If the hybrid system does not start ● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P.66) Contact your Lexus dealer. ● If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions ● When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the “READY” indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the “READY” indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move. ● When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc. ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle →P.59 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-2. Driving procedures 169 ■ If the 12-volt battery is discharged cle, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. The hybrid system cannot be started using the smart access system with push-button start. Refer to P.447 to restart the hybrid system. ■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning →P.64 ■ Electronic key battery depletion →P.413 →P.104 ■ Operation of the power switch ● If the switch is not pressed shortly and ■ Conditions affecting operation →P.120 ■ Notes for the entry function →P.121 ■ Steering lock function ● After turning the power switch off and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the hybrid system may not start. ● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system. ■ Customization If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to P.445. WARNING ■ When starting the hybrid system Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Caution while driving ● To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the power switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning. ■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on In the event that the “READY” indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehi- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ When starting the hybrid system If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately. 4 Driving opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock. ● When the steering lock cannot be released, “Push Power Switch While Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direction” will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the power switch shortly and firmly while turning the steering wheel left and right. ■ Electronic key battery 170 4-2. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Stopping the hybrid system 1 Stop the vehicle completely. 2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake. (→P.181) 3 Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176) Check that the shift position indicator shows P. (→P.176) 4 Press the power switch. The hybrid system will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished (the shift position indicator will be extinguished a few seconds after the meter display). 5 Release the brake pedal and check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is not shown on the meter. ■ Automatic P position selection function →P.177 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency ● If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P.420) However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ● If the power switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds. ● When restarting the hybrid system after an emergency shutdown, press the power switch. Changing power switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) 4-2. Driving procedures 171 ■ When the shift control system malfunc- tions When attempting to turn the power switch off while there is a malfunction in the shift control system, the power switch mode may change to ACCESSORY mode. In this case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned off by applying the parking brake and pressing the power switch again. If there is a malfunction in the system, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on. The emergency flashers can be used. 2 ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. “ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the meter. 3 ON mode All electrical components can be used. “IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the meter. ■ Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (with hybrid system not operating) for more than an hour with the shift position in P, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent the 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the meter, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off. Driving 1 Off 4 172 4-2. Driving procedures EV drive mode In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle. This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions. However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the vehicle may produce sound. Operating instructions Turns EV drive mode on/off When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). ■ Situations in which EV drive mode can- not be turned on It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-infor- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) mation display. ● The temperature of the hybrid system is high. The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc. ● The temperature of the hybrid system is low. The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32°F (0°C) for a long period of time etc. ● The gasoline engine is warming up. ● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low. (→P.96) ● Vehicle speed is high. ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc. ● The windshield defogger is in use. ● When the shift position is in M. ■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. To prevent gasoline engine warm up in order to reduce noises, start the hybrid system without starting the gasoline engine, pressing the power switch with fully depressing the brake pedal and pressing the EV drive mode switch. ■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode 4-2. Driving procedures is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off. ● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low. (→P.96) ● Vehicle speed is high. ● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc. When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior notice screen will appear on the multi-information display. ■ Possible driving distance when driving in ■ Fuel economy The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy. ■ If “EV Mode Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display The EV drive mode is not available. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range or accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available. ■ If “EV Mode Deactivated” is shown on the multi-information display The EV drive mode has been automatically canceled. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery charge is low, vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range or accelera- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) tor pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. Drive the vehicle for a while before attempting to turn on the EV drive mode again. WARNING ■ Caution while driving When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active. 4 Driving EV drive mode EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.) 173 174 4-2. Driving procedures Hybrid transmission Select the shift position depending on your purpose and situation. Shift position purpose and functions Shift position Objective or function P Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system R Reversing N Neutral (Condition in which the power is not transmitted) D Normal driving*1 M M mode driving*2 (→P.179) *1 : To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, set the shift position in D for normal driving. You can choose gear range suitable for your driving situation by operating the paddle shift switches. *2: Any gear range can be fixed when driv- ing in M mode. ■ For the shift positions ● When the power switch is off or in ACCESSORY mode, the shift position cannot be changed. ● When the power switch is in ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating), the shift position can only be changed to N. ● When the “READY” indicator is on, the shift position can be changed from P to D, N or R. ● When the “READY” indicator is flashing, the shift position cannot be changed from P to another position even if the shift lever is operated. Wait until the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing to a solid LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) light, and then operate the shift lever again. ● The shift position can only be changed to M directly from D. In addition, if an attempt is made to change the shift position by moving the shift lever or by pressing the P position switch in any of the following situations, the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled or the shift position will automatically change to N. When this happens, select an appropriate shift position. ● Situations where the shifting operation will be disabled: • When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P to another position by moving the shift lever without depressing the brake pedal. • When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P or N to M by moving the shift lever. • When the P position switch is pressed while the vehicle is running.*1 ● Situations where the shift position will automatically change to N: • When an attempt is made to select the R position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving forward.*2 • When an attempt is made to select the D position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving in reverse.*3 • When the shift position is changed from R to M ● If N is selected while driving at a certain speed, even if the shift lever is not held in the N position, the shift position changes to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds and a confirmation message is displayed on the multi-information display to inform the driver that the shift position has changed to N. *1 : Shift position may be changed to P when driving at extremely low speeds. *2 : Shift position may be changed to R when driving at low speeds. *3: Shift position may be changed to D when driving at low speeds. 4-2. Driving procedures ■ Reverse warning buzzer When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift position is in R. ■ To protect the hybrid transmission If the transmission fluid temperature is high, “Transmission Fluid Temp High See Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on the multi-information display and the vehicle will go into transmission protection mode automatically. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ When driving with the dynamic radar ■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control) →P.159 ■ AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift position to the M position cancels the function.) ■ If a message about a shift operation is shown To prevent the shift position from being selected incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, the shift position may be changed automatically or operating the shift lever may be required. In this case, change the shift position following the messages on the multi-information display. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery →P.393 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING ■ When driving on slippery road sur- faces Do not accelerate or shift the shift position suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident. NOTICE 4 ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge If the shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid leaving the N position selected for an extended period of time. ■ Situations where shift control system malfunctions are possible If any of the following situations occurs, shift control system malfunctions are possible. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place on level ground, apply the parking brake, and then contact your Lexus dealer. ● When the warning message indicating the shift control system appears on the multi-information display. ● The display indicates that no shift posi- tion is selected for more than a few seconds. Driving cruise control with full-speed range activated Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not be activated because the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled. ● While driving in the D position, downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4. ● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in the D position (→P.298) 175 176 4-2. Driving procedures Shifting the shift lever The current shift position is illuminated. When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on the instrument cluster. C P position switch WARNING ■ For the shift lever ● Do not remove the shift lever knob or use anything but a genuine Lexus shift lever knob. Also, do not hang anything on the shift lever. Doing so could prevent the shift lever from returning to position, causing unexpected accidents to occur when the vehicle is in motion. ● In order to prevent the shift position A Shift lever Operate the shift lever gently and securely in the direction of the arrow on the shift position indicator. To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the direction of the arrow and hold it. Release the shift lever after each shifting operation to allow it to return to its regular position ( ). Shifting to M is only possible when the shift position is in D. When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N, D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed and the vehicle is stationary. B Shift position indicator Meter display: The current shift position is highlighted. When any shift position other than D or M is selected, the arrow toward M and the M position indicator are displayed in gray. Shift lever display: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) from accidentally being changed, do not touch the shift lever when not using them. P position switch ■ When shifting the shift position to P Fully stop the vehicle and set the parking brake, and then press the P position switch. When the shift position is changed to P, the switch illuminates. Check that the shift position indicator shows P. 4-2. Driving procedures ■ Shifting the shift position from P to other positions While depressing the brake pedal firmly, operate the shift lever. If the shift lever is operated without depressing the brake pedal, the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled. When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on the instrument cluster. The shift position cannot be changed from P to M directly. In the following situations, the shift position is automatically changed to P. ● When pressing the power switch with the vehicle stopped while the power switch is in ON mode and the shift position is in a position other than P (after the shift position has changed to P, the power switch will turn off)* ● When the vehicle is stopped after the hybrid system has been stopped in an emergency while driving ● When voltage of the 12-volt battery drops while the shift position is in a position other than P * : When the power switch is pressed while driving at extremely slow speeds, such as immediately before stopping the vehicle, the shift position may automatically change to P. Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before pressing the power switch. ■ If the shift position cannot be shifted from P There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) is discharged. Check the 12-volt battery in this situation. (→P.447) WARNING ■ P position switch ● Do not press the P position switch while the vehicle is moving. If the P position switch is pressed when driving at very low speeds (for example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop suddenly when the shift position switches to P, which could lead to an accident. ● In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the P position switch or shift lever when not using them. 4 NOTICE ■ Notes regarding shift lever and P position switch operation Avoid repeatedly operating the shift lever and P position switch in quick succession. The system protection function may activate and it will not be temporarily possible to shift the shift position other than P. If this happens, please wait for a while before attempting to change the shift position again. Selecting the driving mode ■ Driving mode →P.298 ■ Snow mode Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow. Turn the snow mode switch backward. The snow mode indicator illuminates. Turn the snow mode switch backward again to return to normal mode. Driving ■ Automatic P position selection function 177 178 4-2. Driving procedures A Except F SPORT models A Except F SPORT models B F SPORT models B F SPORT models ■ Snow mode automatic deactivation Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in snow mode. Selecting shift ranges in the D position To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift switch. When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range switches to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions. When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range switches to a range that is one range higher than the current range. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The selected shift range, from D1 to D10, will be displayed on the meter. To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time. Meter display Function D2 - D10 A gear in the range between D1 and the selected shift range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving conditions D1 Setting the shift range at D1 A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range. ■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations: ● When the vehicle comes to a stop ● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time ● When the shift position is shifted to a position other than D. 4-2. Driving procedures ● When the “+” paddle shift switch is pressed and held ■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.) Selecting gears in the M position To enter M mode, shift the shift position to M. Gears can be selected by operating the paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing. 179 When vehicle speed drops (downshift only). When vehicle speed increases (upshift only). When the accelerator pedal is firmly depressed. When it is necessary to protect the transmission when the transmission fluid temperature is high or low, or other reasons. Also, the gear will not shift when the vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift operation is performed. ■ Downshifting restrictions warning A Except F SPORT models B F SPORT models 1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The gear changes once every time the paddle shift switch is operated. The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be fixed and displayed on the meter. When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the paddle shift switches are operated. However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving buzzer To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.) 180 4-2. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Operating instructions 1 Right turn 2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it) The right hand signals will flash 3 times. 3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it) The left hand signals will flash 3 times. 4 Left turn ■ Turn signals can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. ■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed Operate the lever again. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) (→P.481) 4-2. Driving procedures Parking brake The parking brake can be set or released automatically or manually. In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically according to the shift lever operation. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually. Operating instructions 181 2 Pull the switch to release the parking brake • Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. • Using the parking brake automatic release function, the parking brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. When using this function, slowly depress the accelerator pedal. Make sure that the parking brake indicator light turn off. If the parking brake indicator light flashes, operate the switch again. (→P.434) ■ Turns automatic mode on The parking brake can be set and released manually. While the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display A U.S.A. B Canada 1 Push the switch to set the parking brake The parking brake indicator light will turn on. Press and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When the automatic mode is turned on, the parking brake operates as follows. When the shift position is shifted from P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light will turn off. When the shift position is shifted to P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light will turn on. 4 Driving ■ Using the manual mode 182 4-2. Driving procedures Operate the shift lever and P position switch with the vehicle stopped and the brake pedal depressed. ■ Turns automatic mode off While the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display after about 1 minute. ■ If “EPB Activation Stopped Incom- pletely” or “EPB unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Parking brake operation sound When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Parking brake operation ● Depending on the power switch mode, ■ Parking brake operation ● When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch. ● When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available. ■ Parking brake automatic release func- tion ● When the shift position is shifted from P, the parking brake will be released in automatic mode. ● When all of the following conditions are met in manual mode, the parking brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. • The driver’s door is closed • The driver is wearing the seat belt • The shift position is in D, M or R ■ If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a Minute” is displayed on the multi-information display If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) the parking brake indicator light will turn on and stay on as described below: ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released. Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds. ● When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ When the parking brake switch mal- functions Automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) will be turned on automatically. ■ Parking the vehicle →P.158 ■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. “EPB Applied” is displayed on the multi-information display. (with the vehicle reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]) ■ If the brake system warning light comes on →P.427 ■ Usage in winter time →P.309 4-2. Driving procedures WARNING ■ When parking the vehicle Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ When parking the vehicle Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and make sure that the vehicle does not move. ■ When the system malfunctions 183 Brake Hold The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift position is in D, M or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift position in D or M to allow smooth start off. Enabling the system Press the brake hold switch to turn the system on ■ When the parking brake cannot be The brake hold standby indicator (green) A comes on. While the system is holding the brakes, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) B comes on. released due to a malfunction Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. ■ Brake hold system operating conditions The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions: ● The driver’s door is not closed. ● The driver is not wearing the seat belt. If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages. 184 4-2. Driving procedures will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically. ■ Brake hold function ● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display. ● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again. ● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ■ When the parking brake is set automati- cally while the system is holding the brakes Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake. ● Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.) ● Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed. Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. (→P.181) ■ When an inspection at your Lexus dealer is necessary When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ If “Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multiinformation display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Warning messages and buzzers Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ■ If the brake hold operated indicator flashes →P.434 WARNING ■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation. ■ When stopped on a slippery road The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road. NOTICE ■ When parking the vehicle The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift position to P and set the parking brake. 185 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers lights listed above turn on and off automatically. 4-3.Operating the lights and wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. 4 (Canada) The daytime running lights turn on. (→P.185) Operating instructions Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows: (U.S.A.) Off ■ AUTO mode can be used when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ Daytime running light system ● The daytime running lights illuminate • The headlight switch is in the ada only), or * (Can- position * : When the surroundings are bright A U.S.A. B Canada 1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P.185) turn on. 2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. 3 The headlights, daytime running lights (→P.185) and all the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again. ● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch. ● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy. ■ Headlight control sensor 4 Driving using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights. ● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.) • The hybrid system is operating • The parking brake is released 186 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. ■ Automatic light off system ● When the headlights are on: The head- lights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and closed if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are closed.) ● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s door is opened. To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or switch is turned off the 12-volt battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes. When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving function will be disabled. When any of the following are performed, the 12-volt battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the 12-volt battery-saving function has been reactivated: ● When the headlight switch is operated ● When a door is opened or closed ■ Welcome light illumination control The front position and tail lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in the position. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) . ■ Light reminder buzzer A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on. ■ Automatic headlight leveling system The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. Turning on the high beam headlights ■ Windshield wiper linked headlight illu- mination When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to , if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle. ■ 12-volt battery-saving function In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the power LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams. 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off. 2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped) AFS operates at speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) Cornering lights When the steering wheel or turn signal lever is operated while the headlights are on (low beam), a cornering light will turn on and light up the direction of movement of the vehicle. The cornering lights are designed to ensure excellent visibility when making a turn at an intersection. However, when vehicle speed is approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or higher, the cornering lights will not turn on. When the shift position is in R while LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) the headlights are on (low beam), both cornering lights will turn on. This is designed to enhance visibility when parking. ■ Cornering lights When the cornering lights are on for more than 30 minutes, they will turn off automatically. 4 Driving AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input. 187 188 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers The AHB indicator will come on when the system is operating. AHB (Automatic High Beam) The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as necessary. ■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off WARNING automatically ■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary. ■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system Do not overload the vehicle. Activating the Automatic High Beam 1 Press the Automatic High Beam switch. ● When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second): • The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more. • The area ahead of the vehicle is dark. • There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on. • There are few streetlights on the road ahead. ● If any of the following conditions are met, the high beams will turn off automatically: • The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h). • The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark. • Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on. • There are many streetlights on the road ahead. ■ Camera sensor detection information ● The high beams may not be automatically 2 Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in the position. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) or turned off in the following situations: • When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve • When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle • When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees • When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road • When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on ● The high beams may be turned off if a 189 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness • When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.) • When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road • When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror • When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck • When the vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly • When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc. • When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner • When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other drivers ■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered. 1 Turn the power switch on while the following conditions are met. ● The headlight switch is in or . ● The headlight switch lever is in high beam position. ● Automatic High Beam switch is on. 2 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 3 Within 30 seconds after step 2, repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in high beam position. 4 If the sensitivity is changed, the AHB indicator is turn on and off 3 times. Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even when the vehicle is stopped. 4 Driving vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected. ● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on. ● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off: • The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead • The movement and direction of vehicles ahead • When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side • When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle • The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.) • The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle ● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly. ● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected. ● In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams. • When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.) • When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc. • When the windshield is cracked or damaged • When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty • When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high • When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights • When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly • When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle 190 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers Turning the high beams on/off manually ■ Switching to the low beams Pull the lever to its original position. The AHB indicator will turn off. Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again. Windshield wipers and washer Operating the lever can switch between automatic operation and manual operation, or can use the washer. NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. Operating the wiper lever Operate the lever and switch as fol■ Switching to the high beams Press the Automatic High Beam switch. The AHB indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on. Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) lows to use the wipers. When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Off 2 Rain-sensing wiper operation The wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. 3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Low speed wiper operation 4 (U.S.A.) or (Canada) High speed wiper operation 5 (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Temporary operation 8 Washer/wiper dual operation Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers operate once more time after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the vehicle is moving.) Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the power switch is in ON mode and the headlights are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled. ■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera- tion Even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode, vehicle speed affects the time until the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs. With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be switched.) ■ Raindrop sensor ● The raindrop sensor judges the amount 6 Increases the sensitivity 7 Decreases the sensitivity LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield. 4 Driving When is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the switch ring. 191 192 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers ● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the power switch is in ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated. ● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode. ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn off approximately 15 minutes after the wipers stop. For details about the outside rear view mirror defoggers: →P.324 WARNING ■ Caution regarding the use of wind- shield wipers in AUTO mode The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers. ■ Caution regarding the use of washer ■ Front door opening linked windshield wiper stop function When is selected and the windshield wipers are operating, if a front door is opened while the vehicle is stopped and the P shift position is selected, operation of the windshield wipers will be stopped to prevent anyone near the vehicle from being sprayed by water from the wipers. When the front door is closed, wiper operation will resume. ■ When stopping hybrid system in an emergency while driving If the windshield wipers are operating when hybrid system is stopped, the windshield wipers will operate in high speed operation. After the vehicle is stopped, operation will return to normal when the power switch is turned to ON mode, or operation will stop when the driver’s door is opened. ■ Outside rear view mirror defogger acti- vation linked to windshield wiper operation The outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn on when you operate the windshield wipers. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. Changing the windshield wiper rest position/Lifting the windshield wipers When the windshield wipers are not being used, they retract to below the hood. To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when parking in cold conditions or when replacing a windshield 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 193 wiper insert, change the rest position of the windshield wipers to the service position using the wiper lever. ■ Raising the wipers to the service position Within approximately 45 seconds of turning the power switch off, move the wiper lever to the (U.S.A.) or (Canada) position and hold it for approximately 2 seconds or more. The wipers will move to the service position. ■ Lowering the windshield wipers to the retracted position With the windshield wipers placed on the windshield, turn the power switch to ON mode and then move the wiper lever to an operating position. When the wiper switch is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop at the retracted position. Even if the wipers deviate while the power switch is off, the wipers will return to the normal position. ■ When lifting the windshield wipers ● Do not lift the windshield wipers when they are in the retracted position below the hood. Otherwise, they may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to a windshield wiper and/or the hood. ● Do not lift a windshield wiper by the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade may be deformed. ■ Lifting the windshield wipers While holding the hook portion A of the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper from the windshield. ● Do not operate the wiper lever when the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to the windshield wipers and/or hood. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving NOTICE 4 194 4-4. Refueling 4-4.Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap The fuel tank of your vehicle has a special structure, which requires a reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. After the opener switch has been pressed, it will take several seconds until the vehicle is ready for refueling. Before refueling the vehicle Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off. Confirm the type of fuel. ■ Fuel types →P.470 ■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. WARNING ■ When refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury. ● Do not allow anyone that has not dis- charged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank. ● Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ● Do not smoke while refueling the vehi- cle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. ■ When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank: ● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. ● Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz- zle automatically clicks off. ● Do not top off the fuel tank. 4-4. Refueling NOTICE ■ Refueling ● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process. Press the fuel filler door opener switch again. ● Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface. Opening the fuel tank cap 1 Press the opener switch. 2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and remove it, then put it into the holder on the fuel filler door. ■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened →P.445 Closing the fuel tank cap After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction. WARNING ■ When replacing the fuel tank cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving The fuel filler door will open within about 10 seconds of the switch being pressed. Before refueling is possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster to indicate the progress of the fuel filler door opener. 195 196 4-5. Using the driving support systems Lexus Safety System+A* 4-5.Using the driving support systems * : If equipped The Lexus Safety System+A consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience: Drive assist systems of Lexus Safety System+A ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi- cles with Lexus Safety System+A) →P.209 ■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) →P.227 ■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) →P.230 ■ AHB (Automatic High Beam) →P.188 ■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) →P.247 ■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range →P.250 WARNING ■ Lexus Safety System+A The Lexus Safety System+A is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions. As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. Vehicle data recording The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as: • Accelerator status • Brake status • Vehicle speed • Operation status of the pre-collision system functions • Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects) • Images from the camera sensor (available only in situations when sudden inputs occur while driving [sudden acceleration, etc.], the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating, the Parking Support Brake function [static objects] was operating, or your vehicle was involved in a collision) The pre-collision system does not LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 197 record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle. Data usage Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device. The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available. Sensors Four types of sensors, located behind the front grille, front bumper, rear bumper and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems. Front LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) B Front side radar sensors C Camera sensor Rear Rear side radar sensors (→P.260) 4 Driving • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner A Front radar sensor 198 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 199 For vehicles sold in Canada 4 Driving WARNING ■ To avoid malfunction of the front radar sensor Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 200 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times. ■ To avoid malfunction of the front side radar sensors Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Keep the radar sensors and their sur- rounding areas on the front bumper clean at all times. A Radar sensor B Front grille emblem If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it. Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area. ● Do not subject the radar sensor or sur- rounding area to a strong impact. If the radar sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and objects may not be detected correctly. If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the radar sensor. ● Do not modify or paint the radar sen- sor, front grille emblem or surrounding area. ● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If a radar sensor or its surrounding area on the front bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the system may not operate and a warning message (→P.440) will be displayed. If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape or other items to the radar sensors or their surrounding area. 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Do not subject a radar sensor or its surrounding area on the front bumper to a strong impact. If a radar sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly. In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. • If a radar sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact 201 • If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor. • If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration). • If the area on the front bumper around a radar sensor is scratched or dented, or the front bumper has become partially disengaged 4 ● Do not disassemble the radar sensors. their surrounding area on the front bumper. ● If a radar sensor or the front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not paint the front bumper any color other than an official Lexus color. ■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Keep the windshield clean at all times. • If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield. • As some glass coating agents may affect the detection performance of the camera sensor, consult your Lexus dealer when using a glass coating agent. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the camera sensor B Approximately 14.2 in. (36 cm) (Approximately 7.1 in. [18 cm] to the right and left from the center of the camera sensor) ● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324) Driving ● Do not modify the radar sensors or 202 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade. If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield. ● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked. If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not get the camera sensor wet. ● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor. ● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact. ● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it. ● Do not disassemble the camera sen- sor. ● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling. ● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor. ● Do not modify the headlights or other lights. 4-5. Using the driving support systems Lexus Safety System+* * : If equipped The Lexus Safety System+ consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience: Drive assist systems of Lexus Safety System+ ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi- cles with Lexus Safety System+) →P.220 ■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) ■ AHB (Automatic High Beam) →P.188 Vehicle data recording The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as: • Accelerator status • Brake status • Vehicle speed • Operation status of the pre-collision system functions • Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects) • Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating) ■ Dynamic radar cruise control with The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle. →P.250 Data usage full-speed range WARNING ■ Lexus Safety System+ The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions. As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency 4 Driving →P.240 203 204 4-5. Using the driving support systems • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device. The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available. Sensors Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems. A Radar sensor B Camera sensor LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 205 ■ Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico 4 Driving LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 206 4-5. Using the driving support systems For vehicles sold in Canada WARNING ■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sen- sor Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times. 207 ■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Keep the windshield clean at all times. • If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield. A Radar sensor B Front grille emblem If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it. ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area. • If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration). ● Do not subject the radar sensor or sur- rounding area to a strong impact. If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the radar sensor. ● Do not modify or paint the radar sen- sor, front grille emblem or surrounding area. ● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the camera sensor B Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the camera sensor) 4 Driving Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. • If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor. 208 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324) ● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade. If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield. ● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked. If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not get the camera sensor wet. ● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor. ● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact. ● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it. ● Do not disassemble the camera sen- sor. ● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Lexus dealer. ● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor. ● Do not modify the headlights or other lights. 4-5. Using the driving support systems 209 PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.213) System functions ■ Pre-collision warning When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action. ■ Pre-collision brake assist When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. ■ Pedestrian alert ■ Pre-collision braking When the system determines that there is a possibility of a frontal collision with a stationary or moving pedestrian in front of your vehicle, a message will be displayed on the head-up display to warn the driver. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving The pre-collision system uses a front radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle and front side sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the front left or right side. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision. 210 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Active steering assist ■ Steering control If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with an object, such as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high, even though the brakes are applied, and that the collision may be avoidable through steering control, the system will steer the vehicle automatically to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and the driver is operating the steering wheel, the LDH system (→P.303) will control the turning angle of the front and rear wheels and effort necessary to turn the steering wheel to help enhance steering responsiveness. ■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat only) If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system will retract the seat belts. Additionally, the system may retract the seat belts if the brakes are applied suddenly or control of the vehicle is lost. ■ Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas- senger’s seat / power rear seat [if equipped]) If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, it may move the seatbacks of the front passenger’s seat and power rear seats to the upright position automatically, if reclined. If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be moved by the pre-collision seat function. ■ Suspension control When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P.303) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system ● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully. • Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: →P.214 • Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P.216 ● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident. 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Pre-collision braking ● When the pre-collision braking func- tion is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied. ● If the vehicle is stopped by the opera- tion of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary. ● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and may prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating. sion braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action. ● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function. ■ Active steering assist ● The steering wheel may turn automati- cally when active steering assist is operating. ● As active steering assist operation will be canceled when the system determines that a collision has been avoided, operate the steering wheel as necessary. ● In the following situations, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action. In this case, the active steering assist may not operate or may be canceled. • If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being operated. In this case the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the pre-collision braking may not operate. • In some situations, while the active steering assist is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action. • When the active steering assist is operating, if the steering wheel is held firmly or is operated in the opposite direction to that which the system is generating torque, the function may be canceled. • If the brake pedal is depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the active steering assist operation may be delayed. ■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function If the pre-collision seat belts have operated and the seat belts are locked in a retracted position, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, release and retract the seat belts to unlock them and then fasten them again. Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can be unlocked by slightly retracting it without releasing it. ■ When to disable the pre-collision sys- tem In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: ● When the vehicle is being towed LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving ● In some situations, while the pre-colli- 211 212 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle ● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation ● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely ● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer ● When a strong impact has been applied to the front bumper, rear bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other situation ● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta- ble manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning ● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty Changing settings of the pre-collision system ■ Enabling/disabling the pre-colli- sion system The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of the multi-information display. The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON mode If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. If the pre-collision system is disabled, the pedestrian alert system will also be disabled. At this time, the FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (→P.227) system will also be disabled. manner or off-road ● When the tires are not properly inflated ● When the tires are very worn ● When tires of a size other than speci- fied are installed ● When tire chains are installed ● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used ● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct a sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian alert system The pedestrian alert can be enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of the multi-information display. At this time, the FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) system will also be enabled/disabled. 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Changing the pre-collision warn- ing timing The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on (→P.86) of the multi-information display. The warning timing for the pedestrian and FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) system will also be changed. The operation timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned off. The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing. 2 Middle This is the default setting. 3 Near The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing. ■ Changing the pedestrian alert tim- ing If the pre-collision warning timing is changed, the pedestrian alert and FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) timing will also be changed accordingly. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Operational conditions The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle, pedestrian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side collision with a vehicle is high. Each function is operational at the following speeds: ● Pedestrian alert: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 40 mph (30 and 65 km/h) ● Pre-collision warning: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3 and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h] and for detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 37 mph [10 and 60 km/h].) • The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, the speed of the approaching vehicle is between approximately 10 and 37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].) ● Pre-collision brake assist: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h] and for detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 37 mph [30 and 60 km/h].) 4 Driving 1 Far 213 214 4-5. Using the driving support systems • The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, the speed of the approaching vehicle is between approximately 10 and 37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].) ● Pre-collision braking: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3 and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h].) • The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more. ● Active steering assist • Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 and 50 mph (40 and 80 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 25 and 40 mph [40 and 65 km/h] and for detecting a guardrail, vehicle speed is between approximately 37 and 50 mph [60 and 80 km/h].) The system may not operate in the following situations: ● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time ● If the shift position is in R ● If VSC is disabled (only the pedestrian alert and pre-collision warning function will be operational) ● When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into ● When an object is approaching the area the vehicle is to be steered into person, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.216) ■ Cancelation of pre-collision braking and active steering assist If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled: ● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly. ● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly. ■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision ● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate. • When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist • When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle • When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes • When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn ■ Pedestrian and bicyclist detection func- tion The pre-collision system detects pedestrians and bicyclists based on the size, profile, and motion of the person. However, a pedestrian or bicyclist may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn 4-5. Using the driving support systems • When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road 215 • When passing through a place with a low structure above the road such as a low ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic sign, etc. 4 • When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road • When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes • When using an automatic car wash • When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner • When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge • When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside • When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist approaches very close to the vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead • When driving through steam or smoke Driving • When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead • When the road surface is uneven or undulating • If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered • When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, walls, etc. • When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve 216 4-5. Using the driving support systems • When there are patterns or paint on the road, a wall, or billboard that may be mistaken for a vehicle, pedestrian, or bicyclist • When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail • When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present • When passing an oncoming vehicle on a narrow road • When driving close to objects such as walls or poles on a median • When passing an oncoming vehicle around a sharp curve • When passing a vehicle which is making a left/right turn • When being passed by a vehicle approaching from the left or right side in front of your vehicle • When passing an object on the side of the road, such as a parked vehicle • When passing an oncoming vehicle on a S curve • When there is an object that may be mistaken for a pedestrian, such as a utility pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at the entrance of a curve • When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on the roadside at the entrance of a curve • If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or motorcycle ● The system may operate the pedestrian alert unnecessarily if it detects the following: • Pedestrians on a sidewalk • Bicycles and motorcycles • Patterns or paint on the road, a wall, median, billboard, etc. that may be mistaken for a pedestrian or bicyclist ■ Situations in which the system may not • When making a left/right turn while a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side in front of your vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) operate properly ● In some situations, such as the following, a vehicle or other object may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly: • If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle • When approaching the side or front of a vehicle • If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck • If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer 4-5. Using the driving support systems • • • • If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper • If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance • • • • • 217 or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor When driving in a location where there are many objects which reflect radar, such as a tunnel or parking garage When driving at night or in a tunnel with the headlights off When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve If your vehicle is skidding If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered 4 • When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm • When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead • When driving through steam or smoke • When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel • When a very bright light, such as the sun LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving • If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car • If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle or guardrail ahead • If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle • If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration) • When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle • When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle • If the wheels are misaligned • If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor • The vehicle is wobbling. • The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds. • When driving on a hill • If a sensor is misaligned • If the headlights are misaligned • When approaching a guardrail at a wide or narrow angle • When a vehicle approaches your vehicle from the front left or right side while your vehicle is entering an intersection with poor visibility • When a vehicle approaches your vehicle from the rear left or right side • When a vehicle approaches the side of your vehicle at a shallow angle • When driving on a road with a grade that changes sharply (sharp incline/decline) ● In some situations, such as the following, the sensors may not detect the lane lines or a safe space the vehicle can be steered 218 4-5. Using the driving support systems into, preventing the active steering assist from operating properly: • When the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see, such as when they are faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is cast upon them • When the lane is more wide or narrow than normal • When there is a light and dark pattern on the road surface , such as due to road repairs • If the system determines that a collision can be avoided by only using the brakes • When a pedestrian is detected near the centerline of the vehicle ● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force or steering force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly: • If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet • If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.) • When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface • If there are deep ruts in the road • When driving on a slope • When driving on a horizontally slanted road ● Some pedestrians and bicyclists, such as the following, may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly: • Pedestrians and bicyclists shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m) • Bicyclists riding on unusual bicycles (bicycles for small children, tricycles, folding bicycles, BMX bicycles, tandem bicycles, etc.) • Pedestrians and bicyclists who are wearing white and look extremely bright • Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not illuminated by the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc. • Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings • Pedestrians and bicyclists near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • Pedestrians and bicyclists which are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road • Pedestrians and bicyclists which are moving fast • Pedestrians and bicyclists which change speed or direction abruptly • Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly emerge from behind a vehicle or large object • Pedestrians and bicyclists which are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.) • Pedestrians and bicyclists wearing oversized clothing, such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure • Pedestrians and bicyclists who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body • Pedestrians and bicyclists behind an object that hides part of their body • Pedestrians and bicyclists who are bending forward or squatting • Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle • Groups of pedestrians/bicyclists which are close together ● Some guardrails, such as the following, may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly: • Guardrails which are less than approximately 1.9 ft. (60 cm) tall • Short guardrails • Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles, etc.) • Guardrails which are not illuminated by the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc. • Guardrails which appear to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings • Guardrails which appear to be nearly the same shape as their surroundings (walls, etc.) • Guardrails which are over a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) • Guardrails which are hidden behind thick grass • Guardrails which are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.) • Curved guardrails or guardrails at the entrance of a curve 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● In some situations such as the following, • • • • • the system may detect a pedestrian and display a warning on the head-up display, even though no pedestrian exists: If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.) When driving on a slope When driving on a horizontally slanted road If the driver’s posture (driver seat position) is extreme, such as excessively reclined If the head-up display position is set extremely high 219 sion braking functions are also disabled. ● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display. ■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi- ■ If VSC is disabled ● If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving nates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system. ● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return: • When a sensor or the area around a sensor is hot, such as in the sun • When a sensor or the area around a sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment • When a sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc. • When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P.324) • If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor ● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. 220 4-5. Using the driving support systems PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+) The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision. The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.222) System functions ■ Pre-collision warning When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action. ■ Pre-collision brake assist When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. ■ Pre-collision braking When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed. ■ Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas- senger’s seat / power rear seat [if equipped]) If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, it may move the seatbacks of the front passenger’s seat and power rear seats to the upright position automatically, if reclined. If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be moved by the pre-collision seat function. ■ Suspension control When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P.303) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture. ■ Steering control When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and the driver is operating the steering wheel, the LDH system (→P.303) will control the turning angle of the front and rear wheels and effort necessary to turn the steering wheel to help enhance steering responsiveness. WARNING driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully. • Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: →P.223 • Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P.225 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident. ■ Pre-collision braking ● When the pre-collision braking func- tion is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied. ● If the vehicle is stopped by the opera- tion of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary. ● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating. ● In some situations, while the pre-colli- sion braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action. ● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function. ■ When to disable the pre-collision sys- tem In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: ● When the vehicle is being towed ● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle 4 Driving ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system ● The driver is solely responsible for safe 221 222 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation ● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely ● When inspecting the vehicle using a The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON mode If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer ● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons ● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta- ble manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning ● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road ● When the tires are not properly inflated ● When the tires are very worn ● When tires of a size other than speci- fied are installed ■ Changing the pre-collision warn- ing timing The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on (→P.86) of the multi-information display. The operation timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned off. ● When tire chains are installed ● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used ● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle Changing settings of the pre-collision system ■ Enabling/disabling the pre-colli- sion system The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of the multi-information display. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 Far The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing. 2 Middle 4-5. Using the driving support systems 223 This is the default setting. ■ Pedestrian detection function 3 Near The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.225) The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing. ■ Operational conditions LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled: ● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly. ● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly. ■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision ● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate. • When passing a vehicle or pedestrian • When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle • When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes • When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn 4 Driving The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high. Each function is operational at the following speeds: ● Pre-collision warning: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].) • The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more. ● Pre-collision brake assist: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].) • The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more. ● Pre-collision braking: • Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].) • The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more. The system may not operate in the following situations: ● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time ● If the shift position is in R ● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational) 224 4-5. Using the driving support systems • When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn • When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.) • When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road • When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road • When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead • If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating • When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls • When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve • When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge • When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside • When a crossing pedestrian approaches very close to the vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes • When using an automatic car wash • When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner • When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead • When driving through steam or smoke • When there are patterns or paint on the 4-5. Using the driving support systems road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian • When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail • When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present 225 emerges from beside a vehicle • If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration) • When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle • When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly ● In some situations such as the following, a • • • • • If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper • If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance • If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car • If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead • If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm • When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead • When driving through steam or smoke • When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel • When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor • When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel • After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time • While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn • While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve • If your vehicle is skidding • If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered • If the wheels are misaligned • If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor 4 Driving • vehicle may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly: If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle When approaching the side or front of a vehicle If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer 226 4-5. Using the driving support systems • The vehicle is wobbling. • The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds. • When driving on a hill • If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned ● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly: • If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet • If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.) • When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface ● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly: • Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m) • Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure • Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body • Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting • Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle • Groups of pedestrians which are close together • Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright • Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel • Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings • Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects • Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road • Pedestrians who are walking fast • Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object • Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.) ■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi- nates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system. ● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return: • When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun • When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment • When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc. • When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P.324) • If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor ● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If VSC is disabled ● If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled. ● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display. 4-5. Using the driving support systems 227 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)* *: If equipped When approaching an intersection at low speed, the radar sensors on the front side of the vehicle can detect approaching vehicles to the left and right of the front of the vehicle. In this case, the head-up display is used to inform the driver of detected vehicles. Multi-information display FCTA system functions *: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. When the system determines that your vehicle may be about to enter an intersection even though a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge you to depress the brake pedal. Head-up display 4 WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the function The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The FCTA system is a supplementary system that informs the driver of vehicles approaching from the left and right of the front of the vehicle. Do not overly rely on the FCTA system. Over reliance on the system may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. The details of the warning display may differ from the actual traffic conditions. Although the warning display will stop being displayed after a certain amount of time, this does not indicate that vehicles or pedestrians are no longer around your vehicle. ■ The FCTA function is operational when The system operates when all of the following conditions are met. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving When the system detects a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle when approaching an intersection, a notification will be displayed on the head-up display and panoramic view monitor*. 228 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● Setting for “PCS” and “CAUTION” in (→P.86) of the multi-information display. ● A shift position other than P or R is selected. ● Your vehicle is approaching an intersection at approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. ● A vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle at a speed between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and 37 mph (60 km/h). ● There are no preceding vehicles ahead of your vehicle. ● The accelerator pedal is not strongly depressed. ● The brake pedal is not being strongly depressed. ■ Situations in which the system may operate even though no vehicles are approaching In certain situations, such as the following, the system may operate even though no vehicles are approaching: ● When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, or walls ● When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present ● When passing an object on the side of the road, such as a parked vehicle ● When a vehicle or pedestrian is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle from far away ● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane your vehicle is driving in ● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving on a sidewalk ● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving away from your vehicle ● When a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle is decelerating or stops ● When a vehicle approaching from the left LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) or right in front of your vehicle makes a left/right turn immediately in front of your vehicle ● When a pedestrian is approaching your vehicle ● When an oncoming vehicle makes a left/right turn ● When your vehicle enters an intersection before a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle ● When stopped at traffic light and a vehicle approaches from the left or right in front of your vehicle ● When driving in a location where there are objects which reflect radar, such as vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs, etc. ● When making a left/right turn in front of an approaching vehicle ● When passing an oncoming vehicle ● When being overtaken by another vehi- cle ● When driving next to another vehicle or a pedestrian ● When a vehicle or pedestrian approaches the side of your vehicle Some objects, such as the following, may be detected and cause the FCTA system to operate: ● Pedestrians ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly In some situations, such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by a front side radar sensor, preventing the system from operating properly: ● If the front end or side of an approaching vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.) 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● If the front end of an approaching vehicle is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.) ● If the ground clearance of an approaching vehicle is extremely high ● If the shape of an approaching vehicle is unusual (tractors, motorcycles with sidecars, etc.) ● If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection area on the left or right in front of your vehicle from a parking lot, etc. ● If an approaching vehicle moves sud- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When the PCS warning light is flashing and a message is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be temporarily unavailable or may be malfunctioning. 4 Driving denly (sudden steering, acceleration, deceleration, etc.) ● When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm ● After the hybrid system has been started and the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time ● When driving on a road with a grade that changes sharply (sharp incline/decline) ● When driving around a sharp curve or on an undulating road ● If a vehicle is approaching from the left or right of the front of your vehicle diagonally ● When a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle from far away ● When there is an object between your vehicle and an approaching vehicle ● When driving in a location where there are objects which reflect radar, such as guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc. ● When a group of vehicles which are close together approach ● Immediately after the FCTA system has been enabled 229 230 4-5. Using the driving support systems LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)* * : If equipped When driving on highways and freeways with white or yellow lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides steering assistance when dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane. The LTA system recognizes white or yellow lane lines using a camera sensor. Additionally, it detects preceding and surrounding vehicles using the camera sensor and front radar sensor. WARNING ■ Before using LTA system Do not rely solely upon the LTA system. The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time. Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ To avoid operating LTA system by mis- take When not using the LTA system, use the LTA switch to turn the system off. Functions included in LTA system ■ Lane departure alert function When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either a warning buzzer will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate to alert the driver. * : Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb When the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates, check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane. When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the lane departure alert will operate even if the turn signals are operating. 231 sound. If the steering assist function is canceled, release the steering wheel and then grip it again to enable the function. When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the steering assist function will operate even if the turn signals are operating. 4 Driving ■ Steering assist function When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane. *: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a certain amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, the steering assist function may be canceled temporarily, a warning message may be displayed on the multi-information display and a warning buzzer may LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Vehicle sway warning function When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver. 232 4-5. Using the driving support systems wheel firmly. ■ Lane centering function This function is linked with radar cruise control and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane. ■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate. ● When the follow-up cruising display is In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle. If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds. Make sure to grip the steering LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING Do not use the LTA system in the following situations, as doing so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.) ● When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.) 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.) 233 ● Objects or patterns that could be mis- taken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.). ● Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc. ● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve. ● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc. ● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered 4 road. due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc. ● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or ● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair. restricted lane due to construction work. ● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone. ● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped. ● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low. ● Tires which differ by structure, manu- facturer, brand or tread pattern are used. ● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways. ■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake ● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving ● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see 234 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Do not modify the suspension etc. If Indications on multi-information display the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.). ● If your windshield needs repairs, con- tact your Lexus dealer. Turning LTA system on Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA system on. The LTA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display. Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA system off. When the LTA system is turned on or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started. A LTA indicator The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status. Illuminated in white: LTA system is operating. Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating. Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert function is operating. B Operation display of steering wheel operation support Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating. Displayed on the outer side of both lane displays: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating. Displayed on the outer side of a lane display: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating. Display flashing on the outer side of both lane displays: Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems centering function). C Lane departure alert function dis- play Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen. Inside of displayed white lines is white Inside of displayed white lines is black played, if the preceding vehicle changes lanes, your vehicle may change lanes as well. Always pay careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety. ■ Warning display When the lane centering function is operating and the system determines that the vehicle may depart from its lane due to a sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging the driver to operate the steering wheel, will be displayed. In some situations a warning display may not be displayed. Indications on head-up display Some displays, which are the same as those displayed on the multi-information display, will be displayed. ■ LTA system curve display on the head-up display Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled. D Follow-up cruising display Indicates that steering assist of the lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle. When the follow-up cruising display is dis- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange. 235 236 4-5. Using the driving support systems The curve display on the head-up display changes according to the direction and curvature of the curve. ■ Operation conditions of each function ● Lane departure alert function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • LTA is turned on. • Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. • System recognizes white (yellow) lane lines. (When a white [yellow] line is recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.) • Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. • Turn signal lever is not operated. (Except when a vehicle is in the lane on the side the turn signal was operated) • Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve. • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.238) ● Steering assist function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function. • Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P.86) • Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more. • Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes. • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating. • TRAC or VSC is not turned off. • Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.237) ● Vehicle sway warning function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P.86) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. • Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.238) ● Lane centering function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • LTA is turned on. • Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane Center” in of the multi-information display are set to “On”. (→P.86) • This function recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or the position of a preceding vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle). • The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. • Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m). • Turn signal lever is not operated. • Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve. • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.238) • Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more. • Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes. • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating. • TRAC or VSC is not turned off. • Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.237) • The driver has one or both hands on the steering wheel. • The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane. • Steering assist function is not operating. ■ Temporary cancellation of functions When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P.236) If the operating conditions are no longer met while the lane centering function is 4-5. Using the driving support systems operating, a buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled . If the alert type customization setting is set to vibrate the steering wheel, the buzzer will not sound. (The steering wheel will vibrate.) If a message urging operation of the steering wheel is displayed, operate the steering wheel. ■ Steering assist function/lane centering ■ Lane departure alert function The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc. If the edge of the road is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function or steering assist function may not operate. In situations such as the following, it may not be possible for the system to determine if there is danger of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in an adjacent lane: ● When the relative speed between your vehicle and surrounding vehicles is large ● When driving around a curve Do not attempt to activate the lane departure alert function. ■ Hands off steering wheel alert When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-infor- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) mation display. If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel for 6 seconds, a buzzer sounds, a warning message is displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. If the steering assist function is canceled, release the steering wheel and then grip it again to enable the function. In situations such as the following, the system may not be able to detect when the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel: ● If a steering wheel cover is installed. ● If the driver is wearing gloves. ● If something is attached to the steering wheel. ● If the driver is gripping the wood trim, stitched area, spokes, or other part of the steering wheel that does not have sensors. In situations such as the following, the hands off steering wheel alert may not operate and the steering assist function and lane centering function may operate even if the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel: ● If an object contacts the steering wheel. ● If a wide object or arms are held in front of the steering wheel. ■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly In the following situations, the functions may not operate properly: ● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines. ● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc. ● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present. ● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc. ● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc. 4 Driving function Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all. The steering control of the function is overrided by the driver’s steering wheel operation. When the vehicle speed is approximately 31 mph (50 km/h) or less, the warning display of the lane centering function will not operate. Do not attempt to activate the steering assist function. 237 238 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white). ● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc. ● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete. ● If the edge of the road is not clear or straight. ● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc. ● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc. ● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera. ● The vehicle is driven on a slope. ● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road. ● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road. ● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve. ● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide. ● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure. ● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short. ● The preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.) ● The preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.) ● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams). ● When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being misaligned. ● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind. ● The vehicle has just changed lanes LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) through operation of the steering wheel by the driver or crossed an intersection. ● Snow tires, etc. are equipped. ● The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds. ■ Warning message If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Warning message “LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” Details/Actions The system may not be operating properly. →Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor. “Front Camera Unavailable →Turn the LTA system Remove Debris off, remove any dirt, On Windshield” rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then turn the LTA system back on. 4-5. Using the driving support systems Warning message 239 Details/Actions Function Setting details The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met. Lane departure alert function Adjust alert sensitivity Steering assist function Turn steering wheel assistance on and off →When the operation conditions of the “Front Camera camera sensor (temUnavailable” perature, etc.) are met, the LTA system will become available. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LTA system back on. →Turn the LTA system off and follow the “LTA Unavailable” appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the LTA system back on. The LTA system cannot “LTA Unavailable be used as the vehicle at Current speed is too high. Speed” →Slow down. If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. ■ Customization The following settings can be changed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Lane centering function Turn function on and off Adjust alert sensitivity Turn function on and off For how to change settings, refer to →P.481 4 Driving The LTA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor. Vehicle sway warning function Adjust alert type 240 4-5. Using the driving support systems LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)* * : If equipped When driving on highways and freeways with white or yellow lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides steering assistance when dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane. When the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane. The LKA system recognizes visible white or yellow lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of the windshield. ■ Steering assist function Functions included in LKA system ■ Lane departure alert function When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates to alert the driver. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane. If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled. 4-5. Using the driving support systems 241 ■ Lane centering function This function is linked with radar cruise control and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane. When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate. When the vehicle is swaying or appears as if it may depart from its lane multiple times, the warning buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving ■ Vehicle sway warning function If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled. 242 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Before using LKA system Do not rely solely upon the LKA system. The LKA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time. Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ To avoid operating LKA system by mistake When not using the LKA system, use the LKA switch to turn the system off. ■ Situations unsuitable for LKA system Do not use the LKA system in the following situations. The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are ● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair. ● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work. ● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc. ● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways. ● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone. ■ Preventing LKA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake ● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights. ● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.). ● If your windshield needs repairs, con- tact your Lexus dealer. equipped. ● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low. ● Tires which differ by structure, manu- facturer, brand or tread pattern are used. ● Objects or patterns that could be mis- taken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.). ● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road. ● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Turning LKA system on Press the LKA switch to turn the LKA system on. 4-5. Using the driving support systems 243 LKA system is operating. Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating. Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert function is operating. B Operation display of steering wheel operation support Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating. Press the LKA switch again to turn the LKA system off. When the LKA system is turned on or off, operation of the LKA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started. C Lane departure alert function dis- play Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen. 4 Inside of displayed white lines is white Driving The LKA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display. Indications on multi-information display Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange. A LKA indicator The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status. Illuminated in white: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 244 4-5. Using the driving support systems Inside of displayed white lines is black Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled. ■ Operation conditions of each function ● Lane departure alert function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • LKA is turned on. • Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. • System recognizes white (yellow) lines. • Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. • Turn signal lever is not operated. • Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m). • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.246) ● Steering assist function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function. • Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P.86) • Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more. • Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes. • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • TRAC or VSC is not turned off. • Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.245) ● Vehicle sway warning function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P.86) • Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. • Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more. • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.246) ● Lane centering function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met. • LKA is turned on. • Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane Center” in of the multi-information display are set to “On”. (→P.86) • System recognizes white (yellow) lines. • Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating. • Width of traffic lane is approximately 8.2 to 13.5 ft. (2.5 to 4.1 m). • Turn signal lever is not operated. • Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 656 ft. (200 m). • No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.246) • Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more. • Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes. • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating. • TRAC or VSC is not turned off. • Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.245) • Steering assist function is not operating. ■ Temporary cancellation of functions When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the 4-5. Using the driving support systems function is automatically restored. (→P.244) ■ Steering assist function/lane centering function Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all. ■ Lane departure alert function The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc. ■ Hands off steering wheel alert ■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road The LKA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized. ■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally. ● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines. ● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc. ● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) or stones are present. ● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc. ● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc. ● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white). ● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc. ● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete. ● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc. ● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc. ● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera. ● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc. ● The vehicle is driven on a slope. ● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road. ● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road. ● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve. ● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide. ● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure. ● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short. ● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams). ● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated. ● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind. ● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection. ● Snow tires, etc. are equipped. 4 Driving When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a warning message is displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. However, depending on the road conditions, etc., the function may not cancel. 245 246 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Warning message If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LKA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Warning message “Lane Keeping Assist Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” Details/Actions The system may not be operating properly. →Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor. “Front Camera Unavailable →Turn the LKA sysRemove Debris tem off, remove any On Windshield” dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then turn the LKA system back on. Warning message Details/Actions The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met. →When the operation conditions of the “Front Camera camera sensor (temUnavailable” perature, etc.) are met, the LKA system will become available. Turn the LKA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LKA system back on. The LKA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor. “Lane Keeping Assist Unavailable” →Turn the LKA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the LKA system back on. If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. ■ Customization The following settings can be changed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Function Setting details Lane departure alert function Adjust alert sensitivity Steering assist function Turn steering wheel assistance on and off Adjust alert type 4-5. Using the driving support systems Function Vehicle sway warning function Lane centering function RSA (Road Sign Assist)* Setting details Turn function on and off Adjust alert sensitivity Turn function on and off For how to change settings, refer to →P.481 247 * : If equipped The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the camera sensor and navigation system (when data is available) to provide information to the driver via the multi-information display and head-up display. 4 Driving If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. in relation to the recognized road signs, it alerts the driver using a warning display and warning buzzer*. * : This setting needs to be customized. WARNING ■ Before using the RSA Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver’s own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules. Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 248 4-5. Using the driving support systems Indication on the multi-information display When the camera sensor recognizes a sign or information of a sign is available from the navigation system , the sign will be displayed on the multi-information display. When a tab other than the driving support system information tab is selected, only a recognized speed limit sign or do not enter sign (when notification is necessary) will be displayed. (→P.86) When the driving support system information is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. (→P.86) If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit sign. Supported types of road signs The following types of road signs are recognized. Non-official or recently introduced traffic signs may not be recognized. Type Speed limit begins/ends* Do Not Enter LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Multi-information display 4-5. Using the driving support systems Type 249 Multi-information display Stop Yield * : Displayed when speed limit information for the road is available from the navigation system Warning indication In the following situations, the RSA system will alert the driver. When the RSA system recognizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound. Depending on the situation, traffic environment (traffic direction, speed, unit) may be detected incorrectly and a warning display may not operate properly. ■ Turning the system on/off 1 Select on of the multi-information display (→P.86) 2 Press on the steering wheel. ■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display In the following situations, a displayed speed limit sign will stop being displayed automatically: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) distance. (When speed limit information is not available from the navigation system) In the following situations, do not enter, stop and yield signs will stop being displayed automatically: ● The system determines that your vehicle has passed the sign. ● The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc. ■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. ● The camera sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc. ● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the camera sensor. ● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms ● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera sensor. ● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent. ● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc. ● The sign is only visible to the camera sensor for a short amount of time. ● The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly. 4 Driving When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed warning threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound. ● A new sign is not recognized for a certain 250 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, such a sign exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging. ● Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle. ● A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized. ● The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load. ● The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly. ● When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized. ● The navigation system map data is old. ● The navigation system is not operating. ● Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the camera sensor) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road. ● Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the camera sensor) while traveling on a roundabout. ■ Speed limit sign display If the power switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the power switch is turned to ON mode. Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed. Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P.253) Constant speed control mode (→P.257) System Components ■ Meter display ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) A Display B Set speed C Indicators LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Operation switches 251 ■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Assisting the driver to measure follow- A Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch B “+RES” switch C Cruise control main switch D Cancel switch E “-SET” switch ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings. The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided. Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed. Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation. ● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved. 4 Driving WARNING ing distance The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. 252 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range setting to off, using the cruise control main switch when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those cov- ered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ● At entrances to freeways and highways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.) ● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor ● In traffic conditions that require fre- quent repeated acceleration and deceleration ● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 253 Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes. 4 Driving A Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch. B Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead. When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising. Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A: If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) or more, when the turn signal is operated and a lane change is made to pass the vehicle ahead, the system will start accelerating your vehicle up to the set speed to assist smooth overtaking. C Example of acceleration When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 254 4-5. Using the driving support systems speed The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising. Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) mately 30 mph (50 km/h). 1 Press the cruise control main switch to activate the cruise control. Radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the switch again to deactivate the cruise control. If the cruise control main switch is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (→P.257) 2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 30 mph [50 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed. Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed. If the switch is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to approxi- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the “+RES” or “-SET” switch until the desired set speed is displayed. 1 Increases the speed (Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) 2 Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Press the switch. Large adjustment: Press and hold the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be 4-5. Using the driving support systems 255 increased or decreased as follows: For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is pressed Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 increments for as long as the switch is held For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is pressed Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2 increments for as long as the switch is held Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the switch is pressed Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the switch is held. *1 : When the set speed is shown in “MPH” *2 : When the set speed is shown in “km/h” Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned ON mode. If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark A will also be displayed. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation. Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m) 4 Driving In the constant speed control mode (→P.257), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: 1 Long 2 Medium 3 Short 256 4-5. Using the driving support systems Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m) Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, press the “+RES” switch. Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off. Canceling and resuming the speed control 1 Pressing the cancel switch cancels the speed control. The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed. (When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.) 2 Pressing the “+RES” switch resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed. However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems cle-to-vehicle distance. 257 Immediately after the switch is pressed, the radar cruise control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator. Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise control off. ■ Warnings may not occur when In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small. When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed Immediately after the cruise control speed was set When depressing the accelerator pedal Selecting constant speed control mode When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc. 1 With the cruise control off, press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed. Adjusting the speed setting: →P.254 Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P.256 ■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when ● The shift position is in D. ● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected 4 Driving When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed 2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 25 mph [40 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed. 258 4-5. Using the driving support systems by using the paddle shift switch. ● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). ● The sensor cannot detect correctly ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle vehicle has been stopped by system control: • The driver is not wearing a seat belt. • The driver’s door is opened. • The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes. If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. speed The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle. ■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising ● Pressing the “+RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed. ● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed. ■ Automatic cancelation of vehi- cle-to-vehicle distance control mode Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no vehicles ahead. ● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor cannot properly detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed on the multi-information display.) ● VSC is activated. ● TRAC is activated for a period of time. ● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off. ● When snow mode is set. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) because it is covered in some way. ● Pre-collision braking is activated. ● The parking brake is operated. ● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline. ● The following are detected when the ■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed. ● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ● TRAC is activated for a period of time. ● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off. ● Pre-collision braking is activated. If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display The radar cruise control system cannot be used temporarily. Use the system when it becomes available again. ■ Brake system operation sound When the brakes are operated in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode, a brake operating sound may be heard. This is not a malfunction. 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. 259 ● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance ■ When the sensor may not be correctly ■ Conditions under which the vehi- cle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly. ● When driving around a curve, on a narrow road, or on a bridge, in a tunnel, etc., where there are objects on the roadside ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.) ● When the vehicle ahead of you deceler- ates suddenly ● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving detecting the vehicle ahead In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (→P.256) may not be activated. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.) 260 4-5. Using the driving support systems BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes. WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the sys- tem The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As the function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. System components A Meter control switches Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off. B Outside rear view mirror indicators LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes. C BSM indicator Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is enabled ■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visi- bility In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see. ■ When “BSM Not Available” is shown on the multi-information display Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. (→P.261) The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 261 ■ Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico For vehicles sold in Canada 4 Driving WARNING ■ Handling the rear side radar sensor Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can operate correctly. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 262 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas on the rear bumper clean at all times. If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message (→P.260) will be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function (→P.264) satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Do not modify the sensor or surround- ing area on the rear bumper. ● If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer. ● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color. Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off Use the meter control switches to turn on/off the function. 1 Press or to select 2 Press or to select then press ● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper. ● Do not subject a sensor or its sur- rounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact. If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly. In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. • A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact. • If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) . . and 4-5. Using the driving support systems 263 Blind Spot Monitor operation ■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors. A Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear 4 view mirrors (the blind spots) using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots) ■ The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. The range of each detection area is: A Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*1 B Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper C Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper D Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper*2 *1 : The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected. *2: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is, LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving B Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible 264 4-5. Using the driving support systems the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash. ■ The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when all of the following conditions are met: ● The Blind Spot Monitor is on. ● The shift position is in a position other than R. ● The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). ■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations: ● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle. ● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane slowly. ● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes. ■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects: ● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.* ● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction ● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* ● Following vehicles that are in the same lane* ● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle* * : Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur. ■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor may not function correctly ● The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situa- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) tions: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area • When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper • When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog • When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle • When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short • When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area • Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle. • When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing • When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle • As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area • When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc. • When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces • When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle • When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area • Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor is turned on ● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations: • When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its sur- 4-5. Using the driving support systems rounding area • When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the detection area is short • When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc. • When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area • When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces • When the tires are slipping or spinning • When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short • When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle 265 PKSA (Parking Support Alert)* *: If equipped The Parking Support Alert system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that a collision with a detected object, such as a wall, or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action. ■ Intuitive parking assist Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect static objects in the detection area when driving at a low speed or backing up. (→P.266) ■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function Radar sensors are used to detect approaching vehicles in the detection areas behind the vehicle when backing up. (→P.273) ■ RCD (Rear camera detection) function (if equipped) A rear camera sensor is used to detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up. (→P.277) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving PKSA (Parking Support Alert) system 266 4-5. Using the driving support systems Intuitive parking assist Setting the buzzer volume ■ Adjusting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. The volume of buzzers for the intuitive parking assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be adjusted simultaneously. Use the meter control switches to change settings. (→P.87) 1 Press or to select 2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press 3 Press or then press . System components . to select The distance from your vehicle to objects, such as a wall, when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped), Center Display and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. and ■ Types of sensors . Each time the switch is pressed, the volume level will change between 1, 2, and 3. ■ Muting a buzzer A mute button will be displayed on the multi-information display when an object or pedestrian is detected. To mute the buzzer, press . The buzzers for the intuitive parking assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be muted simultaneously. Mute will be canceled automatically in the following situations: When the shift position is changed. When the operating function is temporarily canceled. When the operating function is disabled manually. When the power switch is turned off. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Front corner sensors B Front center sensors C Rear corner sensors D Rear center sensors ■ Display When the sensors detect an object, such as a wall, a graphic is shown on the multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display depending on the position and distance to the object. Multi-information display and head-up display 267 4-5. Using the driving support systems When an object is detected, a graphic will be displayed on the panoramic view monitor (if equipped). A Front corner sensor detection B Front center sensor detection C Rear corner sensor detection D Rear center sensor detection Center Display Turning intuitive parking assist on/off A graphic is shown when the Lexus parking assist monitor (if equipped) is displayed. Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the Lexus parking assist-sensor. (→P.87) A simplified image is displayed on the Center Display when an object is detected. 1 Press or to select • When the R shift position is selected 2 Press or to select “PKSA” 3 Press or then press Driving and then press 4 . . to select and . When the intuitive parking assist function is disabled, the intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates on the multi-information display. • When the N, M or D shift position is selected (vehicle moving forward) To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select on the multi-infor- mation display, select and then On. If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the power switch off and then to ON mode. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 268 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ When using the intuitive parking assist Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. ● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). ● The sensors’ detection areas and reac- tion times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed. ● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas. ● The area directly under the bumpers is not detected. ■ When to disable the function In the following situations, disable the function as it may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision. ● The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. ● The front or rear bumper or a sensor receives a strong impact. ● A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed. ● Towing eyelets are installed. ● A backlit licence plate is installed. ■ When using intuitive parking assist ● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact. ● If the bumper or grille collides with something. ● If the display flashes or is displayed continuously and a buzzer does not sound, except when the mute function has been turned on. ● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor. If the error occurs even when there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning. ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ● When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction. ● When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction. ■ The system can be operated when ● The power switch is in ON mode. ● Intuitive parking assist function is on. ● The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. ● A shift position other than P is selected. ● The intuitive parking assist operation ■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean display flashes or shows continuously, and a buzzer sounds when no objects are detected. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Setting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (→P.266) Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to nor- 4-5. Using the driving support systems mal. Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal. ■ Sensor detection information ● The following situations may occur ■ Conditions under which the function may not function correctly Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. ● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.) ● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected. ■ Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● A sensor is covered in any way. ● When a sensor or the area around a sen- sor is extremely hot or cold. ● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. ● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. ● There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. ● A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. ● If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road. ● If the vehicle is significantly tilted. ● The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. ● If objects draw too close to the sensor. ■ Objects which may not be properly detected The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects: ● Wires, fences, ropes, etc. ● Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves ● Sharply-angled objects ● Low objects ● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing. 4 Driving during use. • Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible. • There will be a short delay between object detection and display. Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds. • It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system. 269 270 4-5. Using the driving support systems For vehicles sold in Canada Sensor detection display, object distance ■ Detection range of the sensors A Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) B Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) C Approximately 1.9 ft. (65 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc. ■ Multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to the object will be displayed on the multi-information display, Center Display, and head-up display (if equipped). (As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments may blink.) Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Rear center sensor) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems Multi-information display * Center Display 271 Head-up display : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272) Approximate distance to object: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Front center sensor) Multi-information display *: Center Display Head-up display 4 Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272) Multi-information display * Center Display Head-up display : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272) Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)* Multi-information display * Center Display Head-up display : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272) Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1 Multi-information display*2 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Center Display*2 Head-up display Driving Approximate distance to object: 1.9 ft. (65 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)* 272 4-5. Using the driving support systems *1 : Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272) *2 : The distance segments will blink slowly. Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1 Multi-information display*2 *1: *2 Center Display*2 Head-up display Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272) : The distance segments will blink rapidly. ■ Buzzer operation and distance to an object A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating. The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an object. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the object, the buzzer sounds continuously: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) When 2 or more objects are detected simultaneously, the buzzer sounds for the nearest object. If one or more objects come within approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the vehicle, the buzzer will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps. Automatic buzzer mute function: After a buzzer begins sounding, if the distance between the vehicle and the detected object does not become shorter, the buzzer will be muted automatically. (However, if the distance between the vehicle and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less, this function will not operate.) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The buzzer sounds volume can be adjusted. (→P.266) 273 4-5. Using the driving support systems RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function The RCTA function uses the BSM rear side radar sensors installed behind the rear bumper. This function is intended to assist the driver in checking areas that are not easily visible when backing up. System components If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon (→P.274) for the detected side will be displayed on the Center Display. This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the vehicle. D RCTA buzzer If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately after the RCTA function is turned on. Turning the RCTA function on/off 4 1 Press or to select 2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press 3 Press or and then press A Meter control switches Turning the RCTA function on/off. When the RCTA function is disabled, the RCTA OFF indicator illuminates. B Outside rear view mirror indicators When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash. C Center Display LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) . . to select “RCTA” . When the RCTA function is disabled, the RCTA OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates on the multi-information display. (Each time the power switch is turned off then changed to ON mode, the RCTA function will be enabled automatically.) Driving Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the RCTA function. (→P.87) 274 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Cautions regarding the use of the function The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury. ■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visi- ror indicator may be difficult to see. ■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system volume is high. ■ When “RCTA NOT AVAILABLE” is shown on the multi-information display Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. (→P.262) Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the attached to the rear bumper around the sensors to normal. Additionally, the function may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold environments. ■ Rear side radar sensors →P.262 bility In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir- RCTA function ■ Operation of the RCTA function The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer. A Approaching vehicles B Detection areas of approaching vehicles ■ RCTA icon display When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) detected, the following will be displayed on the Center Display. Example (Lexus parking assist mon- 4-5. Using the driving support systems 275 itor) (if equipped): Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle ■ RCTA function detection areas The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below. 4 Driving The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away. Example: Approaching vehicle speed A Approximate alert distance 18 mph (28 km/h) (fast) 65 ft. (20 m) 5 mph (8 km/h) (slow) 18 ft. (5.5 m) ■ The RCTA function is operational when The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met: ● The power switch is in ON mode. ● The RCTA function is on. ● The shift position is in R. ● The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h). ■ Setting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (→P.266) ■ Conditions under which the RCTA func- tion will not detect a vehicle The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects: ● Vehicles approaching from directly behind ● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle ● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions 276 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects ● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc. ● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle ● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle ■ Conditions under which the RCTA func- tion may not function correctly • When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot ● The RCTA function may not detect vehi- cles correctly in the following situations: • When a sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area • When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper • When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog • When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle • If a vehicle is approaching the rear of your vehicle rapidly • When a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle. • When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade • Immediately after the RCTA function is turned on • Immediately after the hybrid system is started with the RCTA function on • When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions ● Instances of the RCTA function unneces- sarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations: • When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle • When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 277 4-5. Using the driving support systems RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function* *: • When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short • When a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle If equipped When the vehicle is backing up, the rear camera detection function can detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will sound and an icon will be displayed on the Center Display to inform the driver of the pedestrian. Center Display 4 Driving A Pedestrian detection icon Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected. B RCD OFF icon When the RCD function is disabled, the RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the power switch is turned off then changed to ON mode, the RCD function will be enabled automatically.) Turning the RCD function on/off Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the RCD function. (→P.87) 1 Press LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) or to select . 278 4-5. Using the driving support systems 2 Press or and then press 3 Press or and then press to select “PKSA” . to select “RCD” . When the RCD function is disabled, the RCD OFF icon (→P.72) illuminates on the multi-information display. When a pedestrian is detected If the rear camera detection function detects a pedestrian in the detection area, the buzzer and pedestrian detection will operate as follows: Sounds repeatedly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on C If the system determines that your vehicle may collide with a pedestrian in area C Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on ■ The rear camera detection function is operational when ● The power switch is in ON mode. ● RCD function is on. ● The shift position is in R. ■ Setting the buzzer volume The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (→P.266) ■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is displayed on the multi-information display A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the rear camera lens, the system should return to normal. (It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for some time before the system returns to normal.) ■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavail- A If a pedestrian is detected in area A Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on B If a pedestrian is detected in area B Buzzer (When the vehicle is stationary): Sounds 3 times Buzzer (When the vehicle is backing up, when a pedestrian approaches the rear of the vehicle): LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) able” is displayed on the multi-information display ● If this message is displayed after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected, fully turn the steering wheel to the left and then the right on level ground. ● If this message is displayed only when the R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the rear camera lens. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly ● Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly: 4-5. Using the driving support systems LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface • The roadside or bumps on the road • Shadows on the road ● In some situations, such as the following, the rear camera detection function may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area. • When backing up toward the roadside or a bump on the road • If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as when carrying a heavy load • When backing up toward an incline/decline • If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed • If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load • If an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate or rear fog light, is installed near the rear camera • If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper • If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation • If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When water is flowing over the rear camera lens • When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched • If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle ● Situations in which the rear camera detection function may be difficult to notice • If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the surrounding area is noisy, the volume of the audio system volume is high, the air conditioning system is being used, etc. • If the temperature in the cabin is extremely high or low, the audio system screen may not operate correctly. 4 Driving • Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting • Pedestrians who are lying down • Pedestrians who are running • Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area • Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle • Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure • Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or umbrella • Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night ● In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly: • When backing up in inclement weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) • When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched • When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera • When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot • When backing up in a dim environment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot ● Even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly causing the rear camera detection function to operate. • Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle • Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle • Objects moving toward your vehicle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow) • Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road • Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches 279 280 4-5. Using the driving support systems PKSB (Parking Support Brake)* *: If equipped The Parking Support Brake system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision. PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system ■ Parking Support Brake function (static objects) (if equipped) Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect static objects, such as a wall, in the detection area when driving at a low speed or backing up. (→P.286) ■ Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)(if equipped) Rear radar sensors are used to detect approaching vehicles in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up. (→P.291) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) (if equipped) A rear camera sensor is used to detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up. (→P.295) WARNING ■ Limitations of the Parking Support Brake system Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an accident. ● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Parking Support Brake system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions. However, it may not operate in some situations. ● The Parking Support Brake system is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. NOTICE ■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavail- able” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing If this message is displayed immediately after the power switch is changed to ON mode, operate the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for a certain amount of time before the system returns to normal. (If the system is not return to normal after driving for a while, clean the rear camera lens.) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 281 Enabling/Disabling the Parking Support Brake output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possible. The Parking Support Brake can be enabled/disabled on the multi-information display. All of the Parking Support Brake functions (static objects, rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedestrians) are enabled/disabled simultaneously. Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (acceleration restriction) Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the parking support brake. (→P.87) Multi-information display: “Object Detected Acceleration Reduced” 1 Press or to select Buzzer: Does not sound 2 Press or to select . Center Display (Panoramic view monitor): No warning displayed PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (output restricted as much as possible) When the Parking Support Brake is disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates on the multi-information display. To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select on the multi-information The system has determined that stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary. display, select and then On. If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the power switch off and then to ON mode. Multi-information display: “BRAKE!” Displays and buzzers for hybrid system output restriction control and brake control If the hybrid system output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the Center Display and multi-information display, to alert the driver. On vehicles with a head-up display, the head-up display will display the same message as the multi-information display. Depending on the situation, hybrid system LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Center Display (Panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!” PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated Buzzer: Short beep Brake control is operating The system determined that emergency braking is necessary. Center Display (Panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!” Multi-information display: “BRAKE!” PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated Buzzer: Short beep Vehicle stopped by system operation The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation. 4 Driving and then press . Acceleration greater than a certain amount is restricted by the system. 282 4-5. Using the driving support systems Center Display (Panoramic view monitor): “Press Brake Pedal” played.) Multi-information display: “Switch to Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be dis- Buzzer: Short beep PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated System overview If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is possible, the hybrid system output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (Hybrid system output restriction control: See figure 2 below.) Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3 below.) Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is disabled A Hybrid system output B Braking force C Time Figure 2 When hybrid system output restriction control operates LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 283 A Hybrid system output B Braking force C Time E System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high F Hybrid system output reduced G Example: Multi-infomation display: “BRAKE!” Figure 3 When brake control operates A Hybrid system output B Braking force C Time LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating 4 284 4-5. Using the driving support systems D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating E System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high F Hybrid system output reduced G System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely high H Brake control begins operating I Brake control strength increased J Example: Multi-infomation display: “BRAKE!” K Example: Multi-infomation display: “Switch to Brake” ■ If the Parking Support Brake has oper- ated If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking Support Brake will be disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily, brake control can be canceled by depressing the brake pedal or waiting for approximately 2 seconds for it to automatically be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be operated by depressing the accelerator pedal. ■ Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake To re-enable the Parking Support Brake when it is disabled due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, either enable the system again (→P.281), or turn the power switch off and then back to ON mode. Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from moving forward to backing up, or from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically. ■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking Support Brake will be disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal. Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal. ● If this message is displayed only when the R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the camera lens. If this message is displayed in any forward shift position , a sensor on the front or rear bumper may be dirty. Clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers. ● If this message continues to be displayed even after cleaning the sensor, or is displayed even though the sensor is clean, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● Initialization may not have been performed after a 12-volt battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. (→P.284) If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected The system needs to be initialized. To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more. 4-5. Using the driving support systems 285 Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking Support Brake function, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right with the vehicle stopped. 4 Driving LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 286 4-5. Using the driving support systems Parking Support Brake function (static objects)* *: If equipped If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the travelling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the resulting damage. Examples of function operation This function will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle. ■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems 287 ■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively ■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected 4 Driving Types of sensors →P.266 WARNING ■ To ensure the Parking Support Brake can operate properly Observe the following precautions regarding the sensors (→P.287). Failure to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors. ● Do not replace a sensor with a part other than a genuine part. ● Do not subject a sensor or its sur- rounding area to a strong impact. ● Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean. 288 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● If the area around a radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Handling the suspension Do not modify the suspension, as changes to the height or inclination of the vehicle may prevent the sensors from detecting objects correctly or cause the system to not operate or operate unnecessarily. ■ If the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing In the event that the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to proceed forward and leave the area, brake control can also be canceled by depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the accelerator pedal after brake control is canceled will allow you to proceed forward and leave the area. ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ● When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction. ● When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction. ■ When to disable the Parking Support Brake In the following situations, disable the Parking Support Brake as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● When inspecting the vehicle using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller ● When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel ● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ● When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow ■ The Parking Support Brake function (static object) will operate when The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing (→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less. • There is a static object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away. • The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision. ● Brake control • Hybrid system output restriction control is operating. • The Parking Support Brake determines that an immediate brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision. ■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects) will stop operating when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • The system determines that the collision has become avoidable with normal brake operation. 4-5. Using the driving support systems • The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle. ● Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control. • The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control. • The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle. 289 of the approximate distance to the object. ■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision In some situations, such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision. ● Vehicle surroundings • When driving on a narrow road ■ Detection range of the Parking Support 4 ■ Objects that the Parking Support Brake • When driving on a gravel road or in an area with tall grass ■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer • When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom barrier (such as those used at railroad crossings, toll gates and parking lots) • When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge • When parallel parking • When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road • When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches • When driving on a steep slope • If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road function (static objects) may not detect The sensors may not be able to detect certain objects, such as the following: ● Pedestrian ● Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic waves ● Objects which are not perpendicular to the ground, are not perpendicular to the traveling direction of the vehicle, are uneven or are waving ● Low objects ● Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes and signposts ● Objects that are extremely close to the bumper Regardless of whether the intuitive parking assist system is enabled or not (→P.267), if the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) is enabled (→P.281), the front or rear sensors detect an object and brake control is performed, the intuitive parking assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Driving Brake function (static objects) The detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) differs from the detection range of the intuitive parking assist. (→P.270) Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not start operating. 290 4-5. Using the driving support systems ● Weather • If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal) • If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor • When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm ● Other ultrasonic wave sources • When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle • If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor ● Changes in the vehicle posture • If the vehicle is significantly tilted • If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load • If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact ■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not operate properly In some situations, such as the following, this function may not operate properly. ● Weather • When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold • When strong winds are blowing LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal) • If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor • When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm ● Vehicle surroundings • When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object • If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle ● Other ultrasonic waves sources • When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle • If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor ● Changes in the vehicle posture • If the vehicle is significantly tilted • If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load • If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact 4-5. Using the driving support systems 291 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)* *: If equipped If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approaching vehicle. Examples of function operation This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehicle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle. ■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late 4 Driving Types of sensors →P.262 WARNING Observe the following precautions regarding the rear radar sensors (→P.262). Failure to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident. ● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not replace a rear radar sensor with a part other than a genuine part. ● Do not damage the rear radar sensors, and always keep the radar sensors and their surrounding area on the bumper clean. ■ To prevent a rear radar sensor from malfunctioning ● If the area around a rear radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 292 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ● Observe the rear radar sensor han- dling precautions. (→P.281) ■ The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will operate when The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing (→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less. • Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) • The shift position is in R. • The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle. ● Brake control • Hybrid system output restriction control is operating. • The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle. • A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. ■ Detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) The detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA function (→P.275). Therefore, even if the RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating. ■ Conditions under which the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will not detect a vehicle The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects: ● Vehicles approaching from directly behind ● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle ● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions ■ The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation. • A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. ● Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control. • The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or decelerate near your vehicle ● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects ● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc. ● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle ● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle ● Objects which are extremely close to a radar sensor ● Vehicles which are approaching from the 4-5. Using the driving support systems 293 right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) ● Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of more than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) ■ PKSB buzzer If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and brake control is performed, a buzzer will sound to notify the driver. ■ Situations in which the system may and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short 4 Driving operate even though there is no possibility of a collision In some situations such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision. ● When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street ● When the distance between your vehicle ● When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit ● When water is splashed or sprayed toward the rear bumper, such as from a sprinkler ● When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle ● When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not operate properly In some situations, such as the following, the radar sensors may not detect an object and this function may not operate properly ● Stationary objects ● When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold ● If the rear bumper is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. ● When it is raining heavily or water strikes the vehicle ● If the vehicle is significantly tilted ● When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eye- 294 4-5. Using the driving support systems let, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow ● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load ● If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a radar sensor ● If the orientation of a radar sensor has been changed ● When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle ● If a vehicle is approaching the rear of your vehicle rapidly ● Situations in which the radar sensor may not detect a vehicle • When a vehicle approaches from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle while you are turning while backing up • When turning while backing up • When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade • When a vehicle turns into the detection area 4-5. Using the driving support systems 295 Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians)* *: If equipped If the rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is high, a buzzer will sound. If the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes will be applied automatically to help reduce the impact of the collision. Examples of system operation When a pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle while backing up, the brake pedal is not depressed or is depressed late. 4 Driving Center Display Displays a message to urge the driver to take evasive action when a pedestrian is detected in the detection area behind the vehicle. (A message will also be displayed on the multi-information display and head-up display (if equipped).) A Pedestrian detection icon with brake reminder LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 296 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ If the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) operates unnecessarily Depress the brake pedal immediately after the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation of the function is canceled by depressing the brake pedal.) ■ Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) will operate when The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing (→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is enabled. • The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less. • The shift position is in R. • The rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is high. ● Brake control • Hybrid system output restriction control is operating. • The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with a pedestrians. ■ The Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) will stop operating when The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met: ● Hybrid system output restriction control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation. • The pedestrian is no longer detected behind your vehicle. ● Brake control • The Parking Support Brake is disabled. • Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) control. • The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control. • The pedestrian is no longer detected behind your vehicle. ■ Detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) The detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs from the detection area of the RCD function (→P.278). Therefore, even if the RCD function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating. ■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly ● Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians), preventing the function from operating properly: • Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting • Pedestrians who are lying down • Pedestrians who are running • Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area • Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle • Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure • Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or umbrella • Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night ● In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians), preventing the function from operating properly: • When backing up in inclement weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) • When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched • When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera • When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes sud- 4-5. Using the driving support systems LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle • When water is flowing over the rear camera lens • When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched • If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle 4 Driving denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot • When backing up in a dim environment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot ● Even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly causing the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) to operate. • Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle • Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle • Objects moving toward your vehicle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow) • Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road • Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches • Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface • The roadside or bumps on the road • Shadows on the road ● In some situations, such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area. • When backing up toward the roadside or a bump on the road • If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as when carrying a heavy load • When backing up toward an incline/decline • If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed • If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load • If an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate or rear fog light, is installed near the rear camera • If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper • If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation 297 298 4-5. Using the driving support systems Driving mode select switch The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition. Selecting a drive mode Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance. Suitable for city driving. When the shift position is in D, an appropriate gear for sporty driving may automatically be selected according to driver performance and driving conditions. • Custom mode Allows you to drive with the powertrain, chassis and air conditioning system functions set to your preferred settings. Custom mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Center Display. (→P.316) 2 Comfort mode By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced. Suitable for city driving. When not in comfort mode and the driving mode select switch is turned backward, the comfort mode indicator comes on. 3 Eco drive mode A Except F SPORT models B F SPORT models 1 Normal mode/Custom mode Normal mode and custom mode are selected by pressing the driving mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode changes between normal mode and custom mode. When normal mode is selected, the normal mode indicator comes on. When custom mode is selected, the custom mode indicator comes on. Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when not in normal mode. • Normal mode LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling). When in comfort mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned backward, the Eco drive mode indicator comes on. 4 Sport mode • Sport S mode Controls the hybrid system to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when driving on roads with many curves. When not in Sport S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned forward, the Sport S mode indicator comes on. • Sport S+ mode 4-5. Using the driving support systems Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the hybrid system. Suitable for sportier driving. When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned forward, the Sport S+ mode indicator comes on. ■ If the driving mode select switch is oper- ated while the opening screen is being displayed If the driving mode select switch is operated while the opening screen is being displayed, the driving mode will be changed and the meter display will change accordingly after the opening screen operation has completed. ■ Operation of the air conditioning sys- ■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and custom mode If the power switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or custom mode, the drive mode will be changed to normal mode. ■ Driving mode pop-up display When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily displayed on the side display. (→P.317) Electronically modulated air suspension* *: If equipped The height of the vehicle when driving can be selected using the vehicle height adjustment switch. The selected height level will be maintained regardless of the number of passengers or weight of cargo. Additionally, settings of the following functions can be changed: Access mode control Parking height control Vehicle height control ■ Situations in which the vehicle height control may not operate properly ● In the following situations, the vehicle height may change slowly or may not change to the correct height: • When the vehicle comes into contact with snow, ice, stone, etc. • When the ambient temperature is low • When the accumulator tank pressure is low ● In the following situations, the vehicle height may not change: • If the hood or trunk is not fully closed • If the brake pedal depressed and the vehicle is stopped • When the vehicle is on a significantly uneven or undulating road • When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a slope ■ Operating sound of the air suspension compressor and valves When the vehicle height is changed, such as due to passengers entering the vehicle or cargo being loaded, or when the vehicle height is changed using the vehicle height adjustment switch, the air suspension compressor and valves may operate and a sound may be heard. This does not indicate LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving tem in Eco drive mode Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: ● Turn off eco air conditioning mode (→P.327) ● Adjust the fan speed (→P.323) ● Turn off Eco drive mode 299 300 4-5. Using the driving support systems a malfunction. ■ When the accumulator tank pressure is low When the accumulator tank pressure is low, the air suspension compressor and valves may operate repeatedly even though the vehicle height is not being changed. This does not indicate a malfunction. WARNING ■ Situations in which the operation of the electronically modulated air suspension should be canceled In the following situations, make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension and then stopping the hybrid system. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and part of your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. ● When the vehicle is parked on a curb ● If any of the wheels is not touching the ground ● If the vehicle needs to be jacked up ● If the vehicle is to be tied down ● If the vehicle is to be towed ■ Vehicle height control precautions NOTICE ■ Parking precaution If the vehicle is parked for a long time, the vehicle height may change due to changes in the ambient temperature. When parking the vehicle, make sure that the area above and below the vehicle is clear, so that the vehicle will not contact anything if its height changes. Be careful when parking the vehicle in an area with a low ceiling or near low hanging objects, as the vehicle height will increase when passengers exit the vehicle and the access mode control operates. Selecting the vehicle height To adjust the vehicle height to one appropriate for road and driving conditions, press the vehicle height adjustment switch. When high mode is enabled, the high mode indicator on the meter will illuminate. When the vehicle height is increased by the access mode control function, press the vehicle height adjustment switch twice to enable/disable high mode. In the following situations, make sure to check the safety of the area around the vehicle, as the vehicle height may change and part of someone’s body may be caught in the vehicle, possibly causing injury or the vehicle may be damaged. ● When opening a door ● When unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start ● When changing the vehicle height using the vehicle height adjustment switch ■ The vehicle height adjustment switch can be changed when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ System protection function If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 301 4-5. Using the driving support systems and decreased using the vehicle height adjustment switch, etc., the system may not operate temporarily. Changing setting of the access mode control and parking height control The following settings can be changed using the meter control switches for the easy access to the vehicle. (→P.87) 1 Press or to select 2 Press or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press or and then press . to select . 4 Press or to select “Access Mode” or “Select Parking Height” and then press . These settings are memorized even if the power switch is turned off. Access mode control (“Access Mode”) When access mode control is enabled, the vehicle height will increase automatically in the following situations: • When the doors are unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start • When the doors are unlocked using the wireless remote control and then a door is opened. The vehicle height will increase by approximately 1.2 in. (30 mm) from its normal position. The vehicle height may not increase, if the vehicle height already reaches the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The vehicle will return to its normal height when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). When access mode control is disabled, the parking height control will also be disabled. Parking height control (“Select Parking Height”) When “High” is selected, the vehicle height will automatically increase when the P shift position is selected and a door is opened. The vehicle height will increase by approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) from its normal position. The vehicle height may not increase, if the vehicle height already reaches the selected height. 4 The vehicle will return to its normal height when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). Driving 3 Press . selected height. ■ When the vehicle height has been increased by the access mode control function Press the vehicle height adjustment switch with the power switch in any mode to return the vehicle to its previous vehicle height. ■ Situations in which the access mode control function will not operate The access mode control function will not operate if the vehicle is not parked on a level road surface. Disabling the vehicle height control functions The vehicle height control functions can be disabled using the meter control switches. (→P.87) 1 Press or to select . 302 2 Press 4-5. Using the driving support systems or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press 3 Press or and then press 4 Press or . to select . to select “Height Control” and then press Driving assist systems . This setting is memorized even if the power switch is turned off. Even if the vehicle height control functions are disabled, they will be enabled automatically when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 19 mph (30 km/h). To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. Summary of the driving assist systems ■ ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System) ■ When “Check Air Suspension System” is displayed on the multi-information display The system may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface ■ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. ■ Secondary Collision Brake When the airbag sensor detects a collision, the brakes and brake lights are automatically controlled to reduce the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4-5. Using the driving support systems vehicle speed and that helps reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision. ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads ■ Hill-start assist control Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill ■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steer- ing) (if equipped) ■ DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) (if equipped) Contributes to the turning characteristics and responsiveness of the vehicle by adjusting the rear wheel angle of the vehicle in accordance with steering wheel movement. ■ EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel. ■ Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys- tem By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding comfort with superior vehicle stability, and helps good LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) vehicle posture. Also, the damping force changes depending on the selected driving mode. (→P.298) ■ LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system) (if equipped) Provides integrated control of the VGRS, DRS and EPS. Contributes to turning characteristics at low speeds, responsiveness at medium speeds and safety at high speeds by controlling the steering angle of the front and rear wheels in accordance with the steering wheel operation and vehicle speed. ■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte- grated Management) Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, EPS, VGRS (if equipped), DRS (if equipped) and Adaptive Variable Suspension System Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, hybrid system output, steering assist, and steering ratio ■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating. 4 Driving Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and steering wheel movement 303 304 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Disabling the TRAC system Lexus dealer. If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing the switch to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the switch. ■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the switch again to turn the system back on. ■ Disabling both TRAC and VSC systems To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped. The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.* Press the switch again to turn the system back on. * : On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System), PCS will also be disabled (only Pre-Collision warning is available). The PCS warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.219, 226) ■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if the switch has not been pressed TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) control When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate: ● The shift position is in a position other than P or N (when stating off forward/backward on an upward incline) ● The vehicle is stopped ● The accelerator pedal is not depressed ● The parking brake is not engaged ■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations: ● Shift the shift position to P or N ● The accelerator pedal is depressed ● The parking brake is engaged ● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released ■ VGRS is disabled when VGRS may stop operating in the following situations. In this event, the steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but it will return when the system restarts. ● When the steering wheel is operated for an extended period of time while the vehicle is stopped or is moving very slowly (on vehicles with LDH, DRS is disabled together with VGRS) ● When the steering wheel has been held fully to the left or right The center position of the steering wheel may change when VGRS is disabled. However, the position will return to normal after VGRS is reactivated. ■ When the 12-volt battery is discon- nected (vehicles with VGRS) The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected automatically when driving. 4-5. Using the driving support systems ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control and VGRS systems ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. • A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop. ■ ECB operating sound ■ EPS, VGRS and DRS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations: ● When the power switch is turned off ● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys- tem The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes. ■ Secondary Collision Brake operating conditions The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or more and the airbag sensor detects a collision. (The Secondary Collision Brake will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph [10 km/h].) ■ Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation The Secondary Collision Brake is automatically canceled in the following situations: ● The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) ● A certain amount of time elapses during operation ● The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount ■ When “Check VGRS System” or “CHECK DRS” is displayed on the multi-information display The VGRS or DRS may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. WARNING ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). ● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads. 4 Driving ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred. ● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated. ● Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened. ● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system. 305 306 4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations: ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving with tire chains ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces ■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effec- tively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost. ■ Hill-start assist control does not oper- ate effectively when ● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice. ● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident. ■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is acti- vated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary. ■ Secondary Collision Brake Do not overly rely on the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury. ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and the suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction. 4-6. Driving tips 4-6.Driving tips Hybrid vehicle driving tips For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points: Using Eco drive mode Use of Hybrid System Indicator The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. (→P.78, 83) Changing the shift position Shift the shift position to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift position to P when parking. When using the N position, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power. Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released. When braking Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down. Delays Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption. 4 Driving When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (→P.298) 307 308 4-6. Driving tips Highway driving Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down. Air conditioning Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater. Checking tire inflation pressure Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Luggage Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy. Warming up before driving Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption. 4-6. Driving tips Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. Preparation for winter Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine/power control unit coolant • Washer fluid 309 ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ When installing tire chains Before installing tire chains, make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change while installing the tire chains and part or your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. (→P.301) ■ Driving with tire chains Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.* ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. * : Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes. WARNING ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the specified size. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. or over potholes. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. ● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) system. (if equipped) ● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system. (if equipped) 4 Driving Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. 310 4-6. Driving tips NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions: Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels. Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident. Selecting tire chains Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size. Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes. Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle. When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in diam- eter) B Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter) Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes Tire chains cannot be mounted. Snow tires should be used instead. 4-6. Driving tips 311 Regulations on the use of tire chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. ■ Tire chain installation NOTICE ■ Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. Windshield wipers To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when heavy snow or icy conditions are expected, change the rest position of the windshield wipers from the retracted position below the hood to the service position using the wiper lever. (→P.193) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 4 Driving Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires. ● Install tire chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4⎯1/2 mile (0.5⎯1.0 km). ● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains. 312 4-6. Driving tips LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 313 Interior features 5 5-1. Remote Touch/Display . Remote Touch............................. 314 Center Display............................ 316 Rear Multi Operation Panel .........................................................318 5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge Lexus Climate Concierge...... 321 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front automatic air conditioning system ......................................... 323 Rear air conditioning system ........................................................333 5-4. Using the interior lights Interior lights list.........................340 5-5. Using the storage features List of storage features............ 343 Trunk features.............................348 5-6. Using the other interior features Other interior features ............ 351 Garage door opener...............358 Lexus Enform Safety Connect ........................................................ 364 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators................336 5 314 5-1. Remote Touch/Display 5-1.Remote Touch/Display Remote Touch The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Center Display. For details on the Remote touch, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. function, letter or screen button. Certain finger movements on the touchpad can perform functions, such as changing map scalings and scrolling list screens. E Sub function button When is displayed on the screen, a function screen assigned to the screen can be displayed. ■ Using the touchpad Remote Touch operation ■ Switches A “MAP” button Vehicles with navigation function: Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position. Vehicles without navigation function: Press this button to display the compass mode screen. B “MENU” button Press this button to display the menu screen. C Back button Press this button to display the previous screen. D Touchpad Slide your finger on the touchpad and move the pointer to select a function, letter and screen button. Press the touchpad to enter the selected LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 Select: Touch the touchpad to select the desired button on the screen. 2 Enter: Buttons on the screen can be selected by either depressing or double tapping the touchpad. Once a button has been selected, the screen will change. ■ Touch operation Operations are performed by touching the touchpad with your finger. Trace Trace the pad surface while maintaining contact with the touchpad. Moving the cursor and the pointer. 5-1. Remote Touch/Display Double tap Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the button on the screen. 315 NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the Remote Touch. ● Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes to contact the Remote Touch. ● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact. Quick and short movement along the touchpad with you finger. Move the list screen. Pinch in/Pinch out Slide fingers toward each other or apart on the touchpad. Change the scale of the map. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not push the touchpad with a strong force or use a sharp pointed object to operate the pad. Interior features Flick 5 316 5-1. Remote Touch/Display Center Display Switch Function Select to display the media control screen.*1 Center Display overview ■ Menu screen Select to display the hands-free control screen.*1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the menu screen. The displays shown in the illustrations are used for example only and may differ from the actual vehicle. Select to display the “Apps” screen.*1, 2 Select to display the information screen.*1 (→P.97) Select to display the setup screen.*1 Select to display the air conditioning control screen. (→P.326) Switch Function Select to display the “Destination” screen.*1 Select to display the radio control screen.*1 *1: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. *2 : This function is not available on some models. ■ Split-screen display Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side display. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-1. Remote Touch/Display ■ Main display E Show/hide the side display* For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective section and “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Side display or to display the desired A Navigation system* B Audio* C Vehicle information (→P.100) D Air conditioning system (→P.329) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) * : Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Screen display during low temperatures When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even if the Remote Touch is operated. 5 Interior features The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display. Select screen. 317 318 5-1. Remote Touch/Display (if equipped)/rear interior light control screen. (→P.355) Rear Multi Operation Panel* * : If equipped The Rear Multi Operation Panel built-into the rear armrest can be used to operate the rear audio system, air conditioning system, etc. Rear Multi Operation Panel overview ■ Home screen F Touch to display the Rear Multi Operation Panel settings screen. (→P.318) G Show the progress of unlocking the Rear Multi Operation Panel. H Touch and hold to unlock the Rear Multi Operation Panel. I Shortcut button Shortcut screen is displayed. Touch to display/hide commonly used buttons for a selected mode on the bottom portion of the screen. J button Press to display the home screen. ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel set- tings screen Screen operation settings and the brightness of the screen can be changed. A Touch to display the audio control screen. Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. B Touch to display the rear air condi- tioning control screen. (→P.334) C Touch to display the rear seat adjustment screen. (→P.136) D Touch to display the relaxation seat (if equipped) control screen. (→P.138) E Touch to display the rear sunshade LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-1. Remote Touch/Display 319 (10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear Multi Operation Panel must be idle before the automatic screen transition function operates. ■ Operating the Rear Multi Operation Panel ● When operating the Rear Multi Opera- A Touch to turn the screen off. B Touch to lock the Rear Multi Oper- ation Panel. C Touch to adjust the brightness of the screen. D Touch to display the automatic screen transition settings screen. (→P.319) E Touch to display the rear seat ■ Auto screen change settings hold the screen button to turn the Rear Multi Operation Panel off, and then press the button again to turn it back on and operate it. ● In the following situations, the Rear Multi • • A Touch to turn the automatic screen transition function on/off. • • B Touch to set whether the screen will transition to the home screen or turn off when the automatic screen transition function operates. C Touch to set the amount of time LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • • Operation Panel may not operate properly: If wearing gloves during operation, non response may occur. If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear Multi Operation Panel. If a screen cover or coating is applied to on the Rear Multi Operation Panel. If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty or has liquid attached to it, incorrect operation or non-response may occur. If the Rear Multi Operation Panel receives electro magnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may occur. If a mobile phone or other wireless communication device brought near the Rear 5 Interior features return function settings screen. (→P.137) tion Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be operated with a fingernail, pen, etc. ● Use only one finger when operating the Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be operated with multiple fingers . ● When the power switch is changed to ACCESSORY or ON mode, if a hand object, liquid or foreign matter is touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel, it may not operate correctly. In this case, remove anything touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel and wait for approximately 30 seconds before operating it again. If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still cannot be operated normally, press and 320 5-1. Remote Touch/Display Multi Operation Panel. ● If the a metal object, such as the following, is touching or covering the Rear Multi Operation Panel: • Coins • Keys • Metallic wallets or bags • Magnetic isolation cards • Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging of a cigarette box • Disposable heat packs • Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables, such as a USB cable • Mobile devices, such as smartphones, mobile phones, tablets, etc. ● Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel clean . If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty, it may not operate correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi Operation Panel, turn the screen off to avoid unexpected operation.) NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the Rear Multi Operation Panel Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the Rear Multi Operation Panel. ● Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel free of liquids, such as drinks or rain , as they may cause a short circuit. ● Do not sit on or set heavy objects on the Rear Multi Operation Panel. ● Do not push the Rear Multi Operation Panel with a strong force or use a sharp pointed object to operate the panel. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge 321 5-2.Lexus Climate Concierge Lexus Climate Concierge The seat heaters, seat ventilators and heated steering wheel (if equipped) are each automatically controlled according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc. Lexus Climate Concierge allows a comfortable condition to be maintained without adjusting each system. ■ Changing Lexus Climate Con- cierge control screen between front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control) Select “Rear” to display the rear air conditioning system screen. menu and move the cursor to to display the climate control short- Select “Front” to display the front air conditioning system screen. cut buttons. Then, select to display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen. ■ When using the Lexus Climate Con- Turning on Lexus Climate Concierge Select cierge Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated on the sub function menu or option control screen. (→P.326) Operation of each system ■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P.323, 333) The indicator on the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen illuminates, and the automatic air conditioning system, seat heaters and ventilators, and heated steering wheel operate in automatic mode. The temperature can be adjusted independently for each seat. If any of the system is operated manually, the indicator turns off. However, all other functions continue to operate in automatic mode. Heating or ventilation is automatically selected according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc. ■ Seat heaters and ventilators (→P.336) ■ Heated steering wheel (if equipped) (→P.336) Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the set tempera- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5 Interior features Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main 322 5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge ture of the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc. ■ Passenger detection functions ● When a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat, the seat heater and ventilator will operate automatically. ● When a passenger is detected in a rear seat, the seat heater and ventilator will operate automatically. (vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control) ■ Seat heater/ventilator operation When automatic mode is selected using the seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger detection is not performed. ■ Rear seat heater operation (vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control) The rear seat heaters are not controlled by the Lexus Climate Concierge. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 323 5-3.Using the air conditioning system and defogger Front automatic air conditioning system Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to select to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then, to display the air conditioning control screen. The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display. Air conditioning controls 5 Interior features A Left-hand side temperature control switch B Automatic mode switch C Off switch D Fan speed decreases switch E Fan speed increases switch F Windshield defogger switch G Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch H Outside/recirculated air mode switch I Right-hand side temperature control switch ■ Adjusting the temperature ■ Setting the fan speed Operate the temperature control switch upwards to increase the temperature and downwards to decrease the temperature. Operate the switch to increase the fan speed and the switch to decrease the fan speed. Press the off switch to turn the fan off. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 324 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Changing the air flow mode →P.326 ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes after a while. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. ■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch. →P.329 The mode changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. ■ When the outside temperature exceeds automatic mode → (outside air mode) → (recirculated air mode) → automatic mode When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. ■ Defogging the windshield Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows. Press the windshield defogger switch. Set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press the windshield defogger switch again when the windshield is defogged. ■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. Press the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch. The defoggers will automatically turn off LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on ● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption. ● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing the outside/recirculated air mode switch. ■ Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C” on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. ● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog up more easily. ● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■ Outside/recirculated air mode ● When driving on dusty roads such as tun- nels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively. ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature. ■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys ● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the power switch to ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings. 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ● When the power switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle. ● The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door. ● The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting* when unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start can be changed. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. * : The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time. ■ Operation of the air conditioning sys- ■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” is selected. ■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors ● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. ● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occur- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode or with the micro dust and pollen filter on. ● When parking, the system automatically switches to outside air mode to encourage better air circulation throughout the vehicle, helping to reduce odors that occur when starting the vehicle. ■ Using the voice command system Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Air conditioning filter →P.411 ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING ■ To prevent the windshield from fog- ging up Do not use the windshield defogger switch during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operating Do not touch the outside rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. 5 Interior features tem in Eco drive mode In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: ● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity ● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: ● Turn off eco air conditioning mode (→P.326) ● Adjust the fan speed ● Turn off Eco drive mode (→P.298) 325 326 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. Air conditioning control screen ■ Main control screen Using the touchpad of the Remote Touch, select the button on the screen. B to E and H can be adjusted by performing the following operations. Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down. The item can be adjusted by one level. screen : Display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen : Display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen (if equipped) : Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen : Display the option control screen B Adjust the left side seat tempera- ture setting C Adjust the fan speed setting D Select the air flow mode : Air flows to the upper body Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the pad surface. : Air flows to the upper body and feet The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace. : Air flows to the feet Trace operation cannot be used while driving. : Air flows to the feet and the wind- Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control shield defogger operates E Adjust the right side seat tempera- ture setting F Function on/off indicators When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen. G Sub function menu When the sub function button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off. A Sub menu Selecting the sub menu item to switch the main screen. : Display the air conditioning control LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) : Set Lexus Climate Concierge (→P.321) “AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off (→P.330) “OFF”: Turn the fan off 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger “A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification function “DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331) : Set eco air conditioning mode Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control 327 : Air flows to the upper body : Air flows to the upper body and feet : Air flows to the feet : Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates D Select the left side seat air flow mode E Adjust the fan speed setting F Function on/off indicators When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen. : Display the front air conditioning control screen : Display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen : Display the rear air conditioning control screen : Display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen : Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen : Display the option control screen B Adjust the left side seat tempera- ture setting C Select the right side seat air flow mode LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) : Set Lexus Climate Concierge (→P.321) “AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off (→P.330) “OFF”: Turn the fan off “A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification function “4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the driver, front passenger and left and right rear passenger seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331) : Set eco air conditioning mode H Adjust the right side seat tempera- ture setting ■ Option control screen Select on the sub menu to display the option control screen. The functions can be switched on and off. 5 Interior features A Sub menu Selecting the sub menu item to switch the main screen. G Sub function menu When the sub function button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off. 328 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen. Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control A Set Lexus Climate Concierge (→P.321) A Set Lexus Climate Concierge (→P.321) B Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331) C Set eco air conditioning mode Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy. D Cooling and dehumidification func- tion E Select the S-FLOW mode (→P.330) F Prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades (Windshield wiper de-icer) (if equipped) G Removing pollen from the air (Micro dust and pollen filter) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) B Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331) C Set eco air conditioning mode Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy. D Cooling and dehumidification func- tion E Select the S-FLOW mode (→P.330) F Prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades (Windshield wiper de-icer) (if equipped) G Removing pollen from the air (Micro dust and pollen filter) 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Side display Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control 329 seat ventilators control screen (→P.337) B Adjust the left-hand front seat side temperature setting C Adjust the fan speed setting D Adjust the right side seat tempera- ture setting E Select the left side seat air flow mode F Set cooling and dehumidification A Display the front seat heaters/front seat ventilators control screen (→P.337) B Adjust the left-hand front seat side temperature setting C Adjust the fan speed setting D Adjust the right side seat temperaE Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off F Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331) G Select the air flow mode Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control G Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331) H Select the right side seat air flow mode 5 ■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades. The windshield de-icer will automatically turn off after a while. ■ Eco air conditioning mode When Eco drive mode is selected using the driving mode select switch, eco air conditioning mode turns on. When a drive mode other than Eco drive mode is selected, eco air conditioning mode may turn off. ■ Micro dust and pollen filter A Display the front seat heaters/front LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. Usually the system will automatically turn off after a while. In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the dehumidification function may operate or the outside/recirculated air mode may not Interior features ture setting function on/off 330 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger switch to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is filtered even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off. WARNING ■ To prevent burns (vehicles with wind- shield wiper de-icer) Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on. Using automatic mode 1 Press the automatic mode switch or select “AUTO” on the sub function menu. (→P.326) 2 Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch to switch to automatic air intake mode. The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. 3 Adjust the temperature setting. 4 To stop the operation, press the off switch or select “OFF” on the sub function menu. (→P.326) ■ Windshield fog detection function When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog. ■ Automatic mode for air intake control In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function. NOTICE ■ Humidity sensor In order to detect fog on the windshield, a sensor which monitors the temperature of the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is installed. Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor: ● Do not disassemble the sensor ● Do not spray glass cleaner on the sen- sor or subject it to strong impacts ● Do not stick anything on the sensor If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained. ■ Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the automatic mode switch is pressed or “AUTO” is selected. Cool air may blow around the upper body even when the heater is on due to sunlight. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) S-FLOW mode In S-FLOW mode, priority for the airflow is given to the front seats, reducing the airflow and air conditioning effect on the rear seats. The system determines whether or not 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger a front passenger is in the vehicle by the opening and closing of the front passenger’s door. When a front passenger is determined not to be in the vehicle, the temperature indicator and air flow indicator for the front passenger side will turn off. In this case, depending on the set temperature and ambient temperature, priority for the airflow will be given to the driver’s seat only. The following S-FLOW modes are available: Automatic S-FLOW mode 331 system determines that a passenger is in the vehicle. In this case, priority for the airflow will be changed from the driver’s seat only to the front seats only or all seats, respectively. (Depending on the set temperature or ambient temperature, priority for the airflow may not be given to the driver’s seat only.) If a passenger is judged to be in the vehicle, the system will retain the judgement for a certain amount of time after the power switch is turned off. ■ Operation of automatic S-FLOW mode When the system is operating in automatic S-FLOW mode, if a rear door is opened and then closed, S-FLOW mode will be disabled. To enable S-FLOW mode, select the S-FLOW mode switch. In this mode, the system determines whether or not a rear passenger is in the vehicle by the opening and closing of a rear door. When a rear passenger is determined to be in the vehicle, S-FLOW mode will be automatically disabled. ■ Changing from manual S-FLOW mode The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW mode is enabled. Adjusting the temperature for the driver and passenger seats separately Manual S-FLOW mode When the S-FLOW mode switch is selected, S-FLOW mode will be manually enabled/ disabled. The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW mode is enabled. ■ Operation of the air conditioning sys- tem in S-FLOW mode If the front passenger’s door or a rear door is opened then closed, the air conditioning LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform any of the following procedures: Select “DUAL” on the sub function menu. (→P.326) Select “DUAL” on the option control screen. Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting. The indicator on the main control screen comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on. 5 Interior features To enable/disable S-FLOW mode and enter manual S-FLOW mode, select the S-FLOW mode switch. to automatic S-FLOW mode Select the S-FLOW mode switch to disable S-FLOW mode. 2 Turn the power switch off. 3 After 60 minutes have elapsed, change the power switch to ON mode. 1 332 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, perform any of the following procedures: ■ Adjusting the position of and open- ing and closing the air outlets Front center/front side Select “4-ZONE” on the sub function menu. (→P.326) Select “4-ZONE” on the option control screen. Adjust a passenger seat temperature setting. The indicator on the main control screen comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on. Air outlet layout and operations ■ Location of air outlets 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent Rear center/rear side The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected air flow mode. 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear air conditioning system* WARNING ■ To prevent the windshield defogger from operating improperly Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging. 333 *: If equipped The air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. The rear air conditioning system can be operated using the Center Display and Rear Multi Operation Panel. Center Display Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. to display the rear air Then, select conditioning control screen. Touch “Climate” on the home screen to display the rear air conditioning control screen.(→P.318) Touching the shortcut button on the home screen will also display operation buttons for some of the rear air conditioning system functions. *: The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be used to operate the rear air conditioning system if the function is disabled. (→P.333) Rear air conditioning control screen ■ Center Display Using the touchpad of the Remote Touch, select the button on the screen. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features Rear Multi Operation Panel* 5 334 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger A to E can be adjusted by perform- ing the following operations. Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down. The item can be adjusted by one level. Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the pad surface. The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace. Trace operation cannot be used while driving. When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen. G Sub function menu When the sub function button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off. “Rear off”: Turn the rear seats fan off “Rear AUTO”: Set the rear seats automatic mode on/off (→P.335) : Disables operation of the rear air conditioning system using the Rear Multi Operation Panel ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel* Various functions can be operated by touching the displayed buttons on the Rear Multi Operation Panel. * : The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be used to operate the rear air conditioning system if the function is disabled. (→P.333) Rear air conditioning control screen A Adjust the left side rear seat tem- perature setting B Select the left side rear seat air flow mode : Air flows to the upper body : Air flows to the upper body and feet : Air flows to the feet C Adjust the rear seats fan speed set- ting D Select the right side rear seat air flow mode E Adjust the right side rear seat tem- perature setting F Function on/off indicators LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Adjust the left side rear seat tem- perature setting B Select the left side rear seat air flow mode : Air flows to the upper body : Air flows to the upper body and feet : Air flows to the feet 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger C Set the rear seats automatic mode on/off (→P.335) D Select the right side rear seat air flow mode E Turn the rear seats fan off F Adjust the right side rear seat tem- perature setting G Adjust the rear seats fan speed set- ting Shortcut screen 335 Rear Multi Operation Panel 1 Select “AUTO” on the rear air conditioning control screen. (→P.334) 2 To stop the operation, select “OFF” on the rear air conditioning control screen. (→P.333) If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained. ■ Using automatic mode perature setting B Adjust the right side rear seat tem- perature setting Using automatic mode Center Display 1 Select “Rear AUTO” on the sub function menu. (→P.333) 2 To stop the operation, select “Rear off” on the sub function menu. (→P.333) If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Adjusting the temperature setting of the rear seats The temperature setting of the rear seats can be adjusted using the following methods: When the “4-ZONE” indicator is off: Adjust the driver’s seat temperature. Adjust the temperature setting of each rear seat using the Center Display or Rear Multi Operation Panel. Adjust the temperature setting of each rear seat using the Center Display (rear air conditioning control screen) or Rear Multi Operation Panel. 5 Interior features A Adjust the left side rear seat tem- Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after “Rear AUTO” is selected or “AUTO” is touched. Cool air may blow around the upper body even when the heater is on due to sunlight. 336 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger The temperature setting of each rear seat can be changed independently. Air outlet layout and operations ■ Rear center outlets and rear side outlets Heated steering wheel*/seat heaters/seat ventilators *: If equipped Heated steering wheel Warms up the grip of the steering wheel Front seat heaters/Rear seat heaters Warm up the seat upholstery Front seat ventilators/Rear seat ventilators Maintain good ventilation by pulling air through the seat upholstery 1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent NOTICE ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The Center Display and Rear Multi Operation Panel/rear control panel can be used to operate the heated steering wheel, seat heaters and seat ventilators as follows: 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Center Display NOTICE Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the shortcut buttons. Then, select to display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen. To display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen, select equipped) . (if ■ To prevent damage to the seat heat- ers and seat ventilators Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the functions when the hybrid system is off. Control screen Rear Multi Operation Panel ■ Center Display Touch “Climate” on the home screen to display the air conditioning control screen.(→P.318) Rear control panel The rear seat heaters can be operated. WARNING ■ To prevent minor burn injuries Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on: ● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged ● Persons with sensitive skin ● Persons who are fatigued ● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) Main screen Using the touchpad of the Remote Touch, select the button on the screen. A to C can be adjusted by performing the following operations. Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down. The item can be adjusted by one level. Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the touchpad surface. The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace. Trace operation cannot be used while driving. 5 Interior features Touching the shortcut button on the home screen will display operation buttons for the rear seat heaters and rear seat ventilators. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 337 338 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger A Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed level The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi) B Adjust the seat heater temperature level The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi) C Adjust the heated steering wheel temperature level* The heated steering wheel can be adjusted in 2 levels. (Low or Hi) D Automatic mode on/off indicators When the automatic mode is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen. E Sub function menu When the sub function button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be set to automatic mode. : Left-hand side seat heater/seat ventilator B Adjust the front seat heater tem- perature level Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF C Adjust the front seat ventilator fan speed level Each time the switch is selected, the fan speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF D Adjust the heated steering wheel temperature level Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Lo→OFF ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped) Rear air conditioning control screen : Heated steering wheel* : Right-hand side seat heater/seat ventilator *: Available on the front seat control screen only Side screen A Adjust the rear seat heater tem- perature level Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF B Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan A Display the air conditioning control screen →P.329 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) speed level Each time the switch is selected, the fan 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF Shortcut screen 339 B Enables/Disables the automatic mode of the rear seat heaters C Decreases the rear seat heater temperature level If this switch is selected when the rear seat heater temperature level is set to Lo, the rear seat heater will turn off. ■ The heated steering wheel, seat heaters and seat ventilators wheel can be used when The power switch is in ON mode. ■ Air conditioning system-linked control A Adjust the rear seat heater tem- perature level Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF B Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan ■ Rear control panel (if equipped) ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) WARNING ■ To prevent overheating and minor burn injuries Observe the following precautions when using the seat heaters. ● Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater. ● Do not use seat heater more than nec- essary. A Increases the rear seat heater tem- perature level The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5 Interior features speed level Each time the switch is selected, the fan speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows: AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF mode When the seat ventilator fan speed level is Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes higher according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system. 340 5-4. Using the interior lights 5-4.Using the interior lights Interior lights list Location of the interior lights A Rear personal lights (→P.341) B Inside door handle lights C Instrument panel ornament lights (if equipped) D Front personal lights (→P.341) E Front interior lights (→P.341) F Clock light G Footwell lights H Power switch light I Door trim ornament lights J Door courtesy lights K Seat belt buckle lights L Outer foot lights M Rear interior light (→P.341) N Shift lever lights LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-4. Using the interior lights 341 Operating the interior lights ■ Turning the door position on Press the door-linked interior light switch The lights are turned on and off according to whether the doors are opened/closed. When the door position is on, the indicator A illuminates. ■ Using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped) 1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”. (→P.318) 2 To turn on/off the rear interior lights, touch the respective button. 5 ■ Turning the lights on/off Front Interior features Turns the lights on/off (touch the light) When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on. Operating the personal lights ■ Turning the lights on/off Front Turns the lights on/off (touch the light) When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on. Rear On/off The rear interior lights turn on/off together the front interior lights. When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 342 5-4. Using the interior lights ■ Illuminated entry system The lights automatically turn on/off according to the power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed. ■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from Rear On/dimmed/off When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on. being discharged If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■ When front interior light or front per- sonal lights do not respond as normal ● When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to the lens surface ● When operated with a wet hand ● When wearing gloves, etc. ■ Customization Some functions can be customized. (→P.481) NOTICE ■ Using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped) 1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”. (→P.318) 2 To turn on/dimmed/off the rear personal lights, touch the respective button. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. ■ Removing light lenses Never remove the lens for the front interior light and front personal lights. Otherwise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens needs to be removed, contact your Lexus dealer. 5-5. Using the storage features 343 5-5.Using the storage features List of storage features Location of the storage features Vehicles without power rear seat 5 B Auxiliary boxes (→P.347) C Cup holders (→P.345) D Console box (→P.346) E Coin holder (→P.345) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features A Glove box (→P.344) 344 5-5. Using the storage features Vehicles with power rear seat A Glove box (→P.344) B Auxiliary boxes (→P.347) C Cup holders (→P.345) D Console box (→P.346) E Coin holder (→P.118) WARNING Glove box ■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 Open (push button) 2 Unlock with the mechanical key 3 Lock with the mechanical key 5-5. Using the storage features WARNING ■ Glove box light The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on. ■ Trunk opener main switch The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (→P.118) ■ Removing the partition The partition inside the glove box can be removed by pulling it. 345 ■ Caution while driving Keep the coin holder closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Cup holders Front Press in and release the button. 5 WARNING Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside. Rear (vehicles without power rear seat) Pull the armrest down then push in the cup holder trim to extend the cup holders. Coin holder Push the button. Rear (vehicles with power rear seat) Press in and release the button. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features ■ Caution while driving 346 5-5. Using the storage features Console box ■ When stowing the rear cup holders (vehicles without power rear seat) Stow the cup holder with the armrest down. The cup holder cannot be stowed if the armrest is not down. WARNING Press a button to open the console box. The console box can be opened from either side. ■ Tray in the console box ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Inappropriate items must not be stored in the cup holders even if the lid is closed. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ When not in use Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder (vehicles without power rear seat) Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest. ■ To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the lid of the power outlet in the front cup holder when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The tray can be slid and removed. ■ Console box light The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on. WARNING ■ Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. NOTICE ■ Tray Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening and closing of the lid. 5-5. Using the storage features 347 Auxiliary boxes Overhead Press in the button. This box is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items. WARNING ■ Caution while driving Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving. Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop. Rear seat (vehicles without power rear seat) Pull the armrest down then push the knob and lift the lid to open it. Rear seat (vehicles with power rear seat) Pull the armrest down then press the button to open the lid. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) head) Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg). Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident. 5 Interior features ■ Items unsuitable for storing (over- 348 5-5. Using the storage features Trunk features Shopping bag hooks Cargo net (if equipped) The cargo net is provided for securing loose items on the floor or items inside the trunk. Raise the cargo hooks on the floor. Hook the net on the cargo hooks. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the grocery bag hooks Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks. Luggage mats Side Pull the strap upwards to lift the luggage mat and remove it. WARNING ■ When the cargo net is not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks on the floor to their stowed positions. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-5. Using the storage features Front 1 Pull the strap upwards and lift up the luggage mat. 2 Lift the luggage mat until it engages with the hook. 349 Auxiliary boxes Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage mats. First-aid kit storage belt 5 1 Loosen the belt 2 Tighten the belt Warning reflector storage belt ■ Using a belt to hold an object NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the hook for the front luggage mat Do not hang a grocery bag or any other object from the hook. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1 Loosen the belt Interior features To return the luggage mat to its original position, push the hook and lower the luggage mat. 350 5-5. Using the storage features 2 Pass the belt through the clip 3 Tighten the belt Depending on the size and shape of an object, such as the case of a warning reflector, the object may not be able to be secured with the belts or stowed in an auxiliary box. ■ Stowing the belt 1 Fold the belt 2 Secure the belt with the clip To prevent damage to the warning reflector storage belt when it is not in use, stow the belt. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-6. Using the other interior features 351 5-6.Using the other interior features Other interior features USB charging ports ■ The USB charging ports can be used when The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. The USB charging ports are used to supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to external devices. The USB charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes. Depending on the external device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port. ■ Situations in which the USB charging ■ Using the USB charging ports ■ About connected external devices Open the console box lid and open the lid. Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction. Vehicles without power rear seat ports may not operate correctly ● If a device which consumes more than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected ● If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected ● If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device) ● If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun ■ To prevent damage to the USB charging ports ● Do not insert foreign objects into the ports. ● Do not spill water or other liquids into the ports. Vehicles with power rear seat ● When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit. ● Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports. ● Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports. ■ To prevent damage to external devices ● Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features NOTICE 5 352 5-6. Using the other interior features NOTICE ● Do not push down on or apply unnec- essary force to an external device or the cable of an external device while it is connected. Assist grips An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the USB charging ports for a long period of time with the hybrid system stopped. Armrest Vehicle without power rear seat Pull the armrest down for use. WARNING ■ Assist grip Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over. Vehicle with power rear seat Pull the lock release lever and fold the rear seatback down. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the assist grip Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip. Coat hooks To use the coat hook, push it on. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-6. Using the other interior features 353 WARNING ■ Items that must not be hung on the hook Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury. Clock The GPS clock’s time is automatically adjusted by utilizing GPS time information. For details, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. Console box Open the console box and open the lid. 5 Rear (if equipped) Open the lid. Power outlets The power outlet can be used for the following components: 12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A. 120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W. ■ 120 VAC (if equipped) ■ 12 V Open the lid. Front Open the cup holder, and open the lid. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features 354 5-6. Using the other interior features ■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC) The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W. ● Appliances with high initial peak wattage ● Measuring devices that process pre- cise data ■ The power outlet can be used when ● 12 V The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. ● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply Sun visors ● 120 VAC The power switch is in ON mode. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent the fuse from being blown ● 12 V Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. ● 120 VAC Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. 1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. 2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. 3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward. Vanity mirrors Front Slide the cover to open. The vanity light turns on. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-6. Using the other interior features 355 the driver’s power window switch and Rear Multi Operation Panel. ■ From driver’s seat Operate the driver’s power window switch. Rear Press the button to open. The vanity light turns on. A Rear quarter sunshade (if equipped) B Rear door sunshade 1 Extend * ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge If the vanity lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. NOTICE ■ When not in use Keep the rear vanity mirror closed. ■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off. Rear door/rear quarter sunshades (if equipped) The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can be extended and retracted using LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) : If the driver’s power window switch is operated when a rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade is retracted or being retracted, the rear window will open. ■ From rear seat The rear seat power window switches cannot be used to extend the rear door sunshades/rear quarter sunshades. 1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”. (→P.318) Interior features 2 Retract* 5 356 5-6. Using the other interior features 2 To fully extend/retract a rear door/rear quarter sunshade, touch the respective button. WARNING ■ When the rear door/rear quarter sun- shades are being extended or retracted Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as injury may result. ■ Jam protection function Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ■ Operating conditions ● The power switch is in ON mode. ● The rear side windows are fully closed. ■ Operation of rear door sunshades/rear quarter sunshades when extended If a rear door power window switch is operated when the rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract while the rear window is opening. ■ Operating the rear door/rear quarter sunshades after turning the hybrid system off The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can be operated for a while even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or off. However, they cannot be operated using the driver’s power window switch after either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between a rear door sunshade and the window frame, the rear door sunshade will stop and then extend/retract slightly. ■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will always be retracted the first time the button is pressed. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) NOTICE ■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshades Observe the following precautions: ● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components. ● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations. ● Do not attach items to the rear door/rear quarter sunshades. ● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions. ● Do not operate the rear door/rear quarter sunshades continuously for long periods of time. Rear sunshade (if equipped) The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating any of the switches shown below. ■ From front seat Extend/retract 5-6. Using the other interior features 357 ■ Operating the rear sunshade after turn- ing the hybrid system off The rear sunshade can be operated for a while even after the power switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. ■ Reverse operation feature ■ From rear seat Vehicles without power rear seat Extend/retract 2 To fully extend/retract a rear door sunshade, touch the respective button. WARNING ■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as injury may result. NOTICE ■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade Observe the following precautions: ● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components. ● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations. ■ The rear sunshade can be used when The power switch is in ON mode. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Do not attach items to the rear sun- shade. 5 Interior features Vehicles with power rear seat 1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”. (→P.318) To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift position is shifted to R. However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs: ● The switch is pressed again. ● The shift position is shifted to P. ● The shift position is shifted out of P and R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). If the hybrid system is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch. 358 5-6. Using the other interior features NOTICE ● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions. ● Do not operate the rear sunshade con- tinuously for long periods of time. Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed using the HomeLink® to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. System components The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device. A HomeLink® indicator light B Garage door operation indicators C HomeLink® icon Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating. D Buttons ■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® mem- ory ● The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5-6. Using the other interior features ● If learning failed when registering a dif® ferent code to a HomeLink button that already has a code registered to it, the 359 already registered code will not be erased. ■ Certification for the garage door opener For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico For vehicles sold in Canada 5 Interior features ■ When support is necessary Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. 360 5-6. Using the other interior features WARNING ■ Conforming to federal safety stan- dards Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. ■ When operating or programming HomeLink® Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons. Programming the HomeLink® ■ Programming HomeLink® Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed. 1 Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange). 2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons. Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming. ■ Before programming HomeLink® During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm. It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming. Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Program a device. Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners) Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button. 5-6. Using the other interior features 361 gramming a rolling code system”. 5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons. ■ Programming a rolling code sys- tem Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code). 2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming. 1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage. This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details. 5 Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released. Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it. If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Pro- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Interior features 4 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light: 2 Press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2. 362 5-6. Using the other interior features 3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming. If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal. ■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices) When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle. 2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.) 1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled. If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed. 2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door. 3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled. ■ Reprogramming a single Home- Link® button When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten: 1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. 2 When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for 5-6. Using the other interior features the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing). ■ Before programming ● Install a new battery in the transmitter. ● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®. ® Operating HomeLink 363 The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either Home- Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should turn on. Link® buttons The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators. last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds. B Closing This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.) Color Status Orange (flashing) Currently opening/closing Green Opening/closinghas completed Red (flashing) Feedback signals cannot be received LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) or simultaneously. The Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes) 5 Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green). Interior features A Opening and and If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory. 364 5-6. Using the other interior features Lexus Enform Safety Connect* *: System components If equipped Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles. By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A “SOS” button B LED light indicators C Microphone 5-6. Using the other interior features 365 ■ Certification for Lexus Enform 5 Interior features Services Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available: LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Automatic Collision Notification* Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (→P.367) 366 * 5-6. Using the other interior features : U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2 Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P.367) Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P.367) Enhanced Roadside Assistance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P.367) Subscription After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) in the Unites States (1-877-539-8777 in Puerto Rico, 1-800-26-LEXUS in Canada) or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details. ■ Safety Connect Services Information ● Phone calls using the vehicles Blue- tooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect. ● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States, Puerto Rico and in Canada. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will not function in the United States Virgin Islands. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada. For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no Safety Connect services will function in and outside the United States Virgin Islands. ● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible. ■ Languages The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling. ■ When contacting the response center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy. Safety Connect LED light Indicators When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active. 5-6. Using the other interior features The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions: Green indicator light on = Active service Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Lexus dealer) No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active Safety Connect services ■ Automatic Collision Notification ■ Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com. ■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required. If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency. ■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service. Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com. 5 Interior features In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location. 367 368 5-6. Using the other interior features Safety information for Safety Connect Important! Read this information about exposure to radio frequency signals before using Safety Connect; The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996] Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 369 Maintenance and care 6 6-1. Maintenance and care . Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior................................370 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ................................. 373 6-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements ........................................................378 General maintenance ............. 379 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs .........382 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions ........................................................383 Hood...............................................385 Positioning a floor jack............385 12-volt battery............................. 393 Tires ................................................395 Replacing the tire......................405 Tire inflation pressure..............408 Wheels............................................410 Air conditioning filter................. 411 Electronic key battery .............. 413 Checking and replacing fuses ......................................................... 414 Light bulbs..................................... 417 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care Engine compartment...............387 6 370 6-1. Maintenance and care 6-1.Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material. Cleaning instructions Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. Wipe away any water. Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. ■ Self-restoring coat The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches caused in a car wash etc. ● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant. ● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature. The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying warm water. ● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored. ● Do not use wax that contains abrasives. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ Automatic car washes ● Before washing the vehicle: • Fold the mirrors • Turn off the power trunk opener and closer Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Extend the mirrors before driving. ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows and the air suspension unit (if equipped). ● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly. ■ When using a car wash If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: ● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) ● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P.120) ■ Aluminum wheels ● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. ● Wash detergent off with water immedi- ately after use. ● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions. • Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent • Do not use hard brushes • Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather 6-1. Maintenance and care ■ Brake caliper coating (F SPORT mod- els) ● When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the coating. ● Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot. ● Wash detergent off immediately after use. ■ Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. ■ Front side windows water-repellent ■ Plated portions If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows: ● Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. ● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire. ■ When cleaning the windshield Set the wiper switch to off. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades. A Off B AUTO ● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand ● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor ● If something bumps against the wind- shield ● If you directly touch the raindrop sen- sor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor ■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes can cause burns. 6 Maintenance and care coating (if equipped) ● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating. • Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly. • Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period. Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible. • Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows. • Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up. ● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer. 371 372 6-1. Maintenance and care WARNING ■ Precaution regarding the front bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) If the paint of the front bumper is chipped or scratched, the Lexus Safety System+A may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer. ■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the following systems may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer. ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ● Lexus Safety System+A (if equipped) ■ When using an automatic car wash ● BSM Set the wiper switch to the off position. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. ● RCTA ● PKSB NOTICE ■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.) ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • After driving near the sea coast • After driving on salted roads • If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface ■ When using a high pressure car wash ● When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally. ● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water. • Traction related parts • If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface • Steering parts • After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • Brake parts • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • Suspension parts ● Do not wash the underside of the vehi- cle using a high pressure car washer. 6-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material. Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Handling the seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. ■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc. If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ Water in the vehicle ● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi- cle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the trunk. (→P.64) Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. ● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P.29) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents ● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: • Areas other than the seats and steering wheel: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach • Seats : Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol • Steering wheel: Organic substances, such as thinner, and cleaner that contains alcohol ● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged. 6 Maintenance and care ■ Shampooing the carpets 373 374 6-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ Preventing damage to leather sur- faces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces: ● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately. Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents To prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents from becoming clogged, clean them periodically. Clean the vents of the both sides. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plas- tic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■ Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust. ■ Cleaning the air intake vents Remove any dust and clogs from the air intake vents with a vacuum cleaner, etc. The filters are attached to the back side of the air intake vent grilles. ■ When cleaning the inside of the wind- shield Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the camera sensor lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P.197, 204) ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear win- dow ● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display, the filters may be clogged. Remove the air intake vent grilles and clean the filters. 6-1. Maintenance and care ■ Cleaning the air intake vent filters 1 Remove the grille. 375 5 Start the hybrid system and check that “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is no longer displayed on the multi-information display. It may take approximately 20 minutes after the hybrid system is started until the warning message disappears. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 2 Remove the filter. ■ Air intake vents maintenance ● If the vehicle is driven with the air intake vents clogged, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may not be cooled sufficiently, possibly causing in fuel consumption. ● Depending on the conditions under which the vehicle is used, the air intake vents may need to be cleaned more regularly. Make sure to also remove dust and clogs from the inner side of the air intake vent grille. If the filter is damaged, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. grilles and filters may result in damage to them. If you have any concerns about cleaning the filter, contact your Lexus dealer. ● If the vehicle is driven with the air intake vent filter clogged, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may not be cooled sufficiently, possibly causing an increase in the fuel consumption and damage to the hybrid battery (traction battery). ● Depending on the conditions under which the vehicle is used, the air intake vent filters may need to be cleaned more regularly. ■ If “Maintenance Required for Traction 4 Install the filter in its original position, and then install the grille. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display ● It is possible the air intake vents or filters are clogged due to accumulated dust. Clean the air intake vents and filters, referring to the cleaning method. ● If the vehicle is driven continuously with 6 Maintenance and care 3 Remove any dust and clogs from the filter using a vacuum cleaner, etc. ■ Cleaning the air intake vent filters ● Improper handling of the air intake vent 376 6-1. Maintenance and care this message displayed, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may not be cooled sufficiently, which may lead to the driving distance by the electric motor becoming shorter and damage to the hybrid battery (traction battery). Clean the air intake vents periodically to prevent dust, etc., from collecting in the air intake vents and filters. ● If the massage in the multi-information display does not turn off, even if the air intake vents are cleaned, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. WARNING ■ When cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents/filters ● Do not use water or other liquids to clean the air intake vents/filters. If water is applied to the hybrid battery (traction battery) or other components, a malfunction or fire may occur. ● When the air intake vent grilles, located near the rear seats are to be removed, make sure to turn the power switch off to stop the hybrid system. Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents Remove dirt using a water-dampened soft cloth or synthetic chamois. Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. ■ Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents The metal areas use a layer of real metal for the surface. It is necessary to clean them regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for long periods of time, they may be difficult to clean. Cleaning the leather areas Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area. ■ Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. Cleaning the synthetic leather areas Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. Cleaning fabric portions of the instrument panel To remove dust from the fabric, use LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-1. Maintenance and care 377 a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape. Use a cloth dampened with water to gently wipe the fabric clean. Do not use detergents to clean the fabric. 6 Maintenance and care LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 378 6-2. Maintenance 6-2.Maintenance Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the maintenance below. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehi- cles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. ● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P.393) ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be per- formed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operation of all systems on your vehicle. ● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. WARNING ■ If your vehicle is not properly main- tained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury. ■ Handling of the 12-volt battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constitu- ents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”. ■ Resetting the message indicating main- tenance is required After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message. To reset the message, follow the procedure described below: 1 Press or switch to select 2 Press or of the meter control . to select “Vehicle Set- tings” and then press . 6-2. Maintenance 3 Press or to select “Scheduled Maintenance” and then press 4 Press then press or 379 General maintenance . to select “Yes” and . A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed. Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. WARNING ■ If the hybrid system is operating Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. Engine compartment Items Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P.391) Is the engine/power Engine/power control unit coolant at control unit coolthe correct level? ant (→P.390) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P.388) Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or strange sounds. 6 Maintenance and care Brake fluid Check points 380 6-2. Maintenance Items Check points Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (→P.391) Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P.392) Items Brakes • The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied. • The brakes should work effectively. • The brake pedal should not feel spongy. • The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied. Head restraints • Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? Parking brake • Does the parking brake operate normally? • When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped? Seat belts • Do the seat belts operate smoothly? • The seat belts should not be damaged. Trunk Items 12-volt battery Check points Check the connections. (→P.393) Vehicle interior Items Accelerator pedal Check points • The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching). • When parked on a Hybrid transmisslope and the shift sion “Park” mech- position is in P, is the anism vehicle securely stopped? Brake pedal • Does the brake pedal move smoothly? • Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? • Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Check points 6-2. Maintenance Items Check points Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Steering wheel • Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly? • Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play? • There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel. Vehicle exterior Items Check points • Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly? Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system work properly? Fluid leaks • There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Check points Tires • Is the tire inflation pressure correct? • The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. • Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • The wheel nuts should not be loose. Windshield wipers • The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation. • The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping. 6 Maintenance and care Doors/trunk Items 381 382 6-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations: When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections. Maintenance Items Parts and tools • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) Brake fluid level (→P.391) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Engine/power For the U.S.A.: control unit cool“Toyota Super Long ant level Life Coolant” is (→P.390) pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding coolant) Engine oil level (→P.388) • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (→P.414) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Radiator and condenser (→P.391) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Parts and tools ⎯ 6 Maintenance and care 12-volt battery condition (→P.393) Items 383 384 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools • Tire pressure gauge Tire inflation pres• Compressed air sure (→P.408) source Washer fluid (→P.392) • Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid) WARNING The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the engine com- partment ● Make sure that the “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” on the multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are both off. ● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment. ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When working near the electric cool- ing fan or radiator grille Be sure the power switch is off. With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P.391) ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes. NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 385 Hood Positioning a floor jack Opening the hood When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely. When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. 1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. Location of the jack point 2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. ■ Front 2WD models 6 ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care WARNING 386 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance AWD models ■ Rear LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 387 Engine compartment Components A Engine oil level dipstick (→P.388) C Engine coolant reservoir (→P.390) D Engine oil filler cap (→P.389) E Brake fluid reservoir (→P.391) F Fuse boxes (→P.414) G Washer fluid tank (→P.392) H Engine coolant radiator (→P.391) I Power control unit coolant radiator (→P.391) J Electric cooling fan K Condenser (→P.391) ■ 12-volt battery →P.393 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care B Power control unit coolant reservoir (→P.390) 6 388 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment cover Outside Front ■ Installing the clips NOTICE ■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position. Checking and adding the engine oil 1 Push up center portion A 2 Insert 3 Press With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance drain back into the bottom of the engine. 2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out. 389 prepare the items needed before adding oil. Engine oil selection →P.462 Oil quantity (Low → Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) Item Clean funnel ■ Adding engine oil 3 Wipe the dipstick clean. If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine. 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. 5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. 6 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. A Low B Normal C Excessive The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine. 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. ■ Checking the oil type and prepar- ing the item needed Make sure to check the oil type and LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise. ■ Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. ● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine ● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used ● When driving at high engine speeds or Maintenance and care 1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 390 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently ● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic ■ After changing the engine oil The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures: 1 Press or of the meter control switch to select 2 Press or . to select “Vehicle Set- tings” and then press 3 Press or to select “Oil Mainte- nance” and then press 4 Press then press . or NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop- erly tightened. . to select “Yes” and . A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed. WARNING Checking the coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. ■ Engine coolant reservoir ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. ● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. A Reservoir cap B “F” line C “L” line If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453) ■ Power control unit coolant reser- voir The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance cold. 391 WARNING ■ When the hybrid system is hot Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps. (→P.456) The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. NOTICE A Reservoir cap ■ When adding coolant B “F” line Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. C “L” line If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453) ■ Coolant selection ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint. Checking the radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. WARNING ■ When the hybrid system is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns. Checking and adding the brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ If you spill coolant 392 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem. Adding the washer fluid ■ Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item. If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid Item Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. WARNING ■ When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. 393 12-volt battery Location The 12-volt battery is located in the trunk under the luggage mat. Removing the luggage mat: →P.348 ■ Before recharging ■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery ● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. ● Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt. ● The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging: ● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery. 394 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance nected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power before disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown. If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin WARNING ■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion. For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer. working near the 12-volt battery. ● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. ■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation. NOTICE ■ When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. Exterior Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 395 Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. Checking tires A Terminals B Hold-down clamp Checking the 12-volt battery condition Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the 12-volt battery condition by indicator color. 6 B Red: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. C Clear: Replacement is necessary. Have the 12-volt battery checked by your Lexus dealer. A New tread B Worn tread C Treadwear indicator The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire. Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care A Blue: Good condition 396 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P.472) roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. ● All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. ● Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P.309) ■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost. WARNING ■ Tire types ● Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). ● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. NOTICE ■ Driving on rough roads Tire rotation Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size Rotate the tires in the order shown. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes Tires cannot be rotated. Run-flat tires When run-flat tires are installed, the vehicle can be driven for a maximum of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 50 mph (80 km/h) after any tire goes flat. (However, the vehicle speed may not increase to near 50 mph [80 km/h] depending on weather or driving conditions.) A run-flat tire has a the side wall. mark on Make sure to replace the flat tire before the vehicle has been driven for near 100 miles (160 km). Also, do not use a repaired tire. ■ Run-flat tires ● The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle. Do not use the tires on other vehicles. ● Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires. ● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it may be impossible to sufficiently demonstrate the performance of run-flat tires. Tire pressure warning system Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. 397 398 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance before serious problems arise. The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.86) If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P.431) ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■ Tire inflation pressure ● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted. ● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge. ■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly ● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. • If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. • If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire. • If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size. • If tire chains, etc. are installed. • An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped. • If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. • If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings. • If the tire inflation pressure is much higher than the specified level. • If wheels not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitter are used. • If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. ● Performance may be affected in the following situations. • When driving near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise • When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by changing the location of the vehicle as the radio wave conditions may change. ● When the vehicle is stopped, the time taken for the warning to start or turn off may be longer. ● When the inflation pressure of a tire drops rapidly, for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not operate. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Warning performance of the tire pres- sure warning system The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with driving conditions. For this reason, the system 399 may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized. ■ Tire pressure warning system certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico 6 Maintenance and care LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 400 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance For vehicles sold in Canada LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When replacing the tires or wheels, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels which will be installed to the vehicle. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. (→P.403) ■ Replacing tires and wheels If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. In this case, after driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then illuminate to indicate a system malfunction. ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps ● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water may enter the valves of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and the valves may become stuck. ● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck. Initializing the tire pressure warning system ■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight. When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changed. When rotating the tires. After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure. (→P.403) When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure. warning system 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off. The initialization procedure cannot be started while the vehicle is moving. 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. 3 Turn the power switch to ON mode. 4 Press or of the meter con- trol switch to select LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 ■ How to initialize the tire pressure . Maintenance and care NOTICE 401 402 5 Press 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press 6 Press or and then press 7 Press or . to select “TPWS” . to select “Set Pressure”. Then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks 3 times. Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. “--” will be displayed on the multiinformation display for the inflation pressure of each tire while initialization is being performed. performing the initialization procedure or adjusting the tire inflation pressure. ● If the power switch is turned off during initialization, it is not necessary to restart the initialization procedure from the beginning as it will begin automatically when the power switch is turned back to ON mode. ● If initialization has accidentally been started when it is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold and then perform the initialization procedure again. ● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on. ■ If the tire pressure warning system is not 8 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes. Initialization is complete when the position of each tire is determined and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display. Initialization may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. (→P.402) ■ Initialization procedure ● Make sure to perform the initialization procedure after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) initialized properly ● In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.) If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while. • If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer to complete initialization. • If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take longer than normal to complete. • If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles. If initialization is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again. ● In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization proce- 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance dure again. • If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times. • If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates. ● If initialization cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer. WARNING 403 4 Press or to select “Change Wheel Set”. Then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times. Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and “--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display. ■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not initialize the tire pressure warning system without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. Registering ID codes The ID codes can be registered on of the multi-information display. 1 Press or of the meter con- trol switch to select 2 Press or . to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press 3 Press or and then press . to select “TPWS” . LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Registration is complete when the tire pressure warning light turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multiinformation display. Registration may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. (→P.404) After registering the ID codes, make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system. (→P.401) ■ When registering ID codes ● Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle. ● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID 6 Maintenance and care Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID codes. 5 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes. 404 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid. ● As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization. ■ Canceling ID code registration ● To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, turn the power switch off before driving the vehicle. If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and turn the power switch off before driving. ● If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the power switch is turned to ON mode and then illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational when the tire pressure warning light turns off. ● If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, ID code registration may not have been cancelled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and then turn the power switch off before driving. ■ If ID codes are not registered properly ● In the following situations, ID code regis- tration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.) If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while. • If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer than normal to complete registration. • If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during registration will be cleared, and it will take longer than normal to complete. • If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles. • If a wheel with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle, registration of the ID codes for the installed wheels may not be possible. If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again. ● In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again. • If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times. • If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates. ● If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing the tire When raising your vehicle with a jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. If necessary tire replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer. Before jacking up the vehicle Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. Set the parking brake. Shift the shift position to P. Disabling the height control. (if equipped) (→P.301) Stop the hybrid system. ■ Jack and tools WARNING ■ Using the tire jack Observe the following precautions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ● Do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ● Put the jack properly in its jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. ● Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. ● Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension and then stopping the hybrid system. (→P.301) ● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering. ■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power trunk opener and closer In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the trunk opener main switch (→P.118). Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to operate unintentionally if the power trunk opener and closer switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6 Maintenance and care As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, the following tools for replacing a tire are not included with your vehicle. They can be purchased at your Lexus dealer. ● Wheel nut wrench ● Jack ● Jack handle 405 406 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance point positions. Removing a tire 1 Chock the tires. 4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. Tire Front Rear Wheel chock positions Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire 2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). 3 Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ■ Replacing a tire Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. 407 A Disc wheel B Washer 3 Lower the vehicle. Installing the tire 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off. 4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. Tightening torque: 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 6 Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel. WARNING ■ When installing the tire Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care 2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. 408 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. ● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. ● When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. Tire inflation pressure Checking the specified tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P.466) ● If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps →P.401 Inspection and adjustment procedure A Tire valve B Tire pressure gauge LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 6 Put the tire valve cap back on. ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval ing. ● Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance. ● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. ● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. WARNING ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. ● Excessive wear ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres- ● Poor handling ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure read- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Uneven wear ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Air leaking from between tire and wheel ● Wheel deformation and/or tire dam- age ● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges on the road, etc.) NOTICE ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure. 6 Maintenance and care sure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel economy ● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling ● Reduced tire life due to wear ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 409 410 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control. Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*. WARNING ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. ■ Use of defective wheels prohibited Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident. NOTICE ■ Replacing tire pressure warning Lexus does not recommend using the following: valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. Wheels of different sizes or types ● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. * : Conventionally referred to as offset. Used wheels Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P.401) WARNING ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels. Aluminum wheel precautions Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wheel nut wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. 411 Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. Removing the air conditioning filter 1 Turn the power switch off. 2 Open the glove box. Remove the partition. (→P.345) 3 Remove the panel. 6 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Maintenance and care 4 Unlock the filter cover ( A ), pull the filter cover out of the claws ( B ), and remove the filter cover. 412 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 5 Remove the filter case. filter. NOTICE ■ When using the air conditioning sys- tem Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system. ■ To prevent damage to the filter cover 6 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one. The “ UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up. ■ Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.) ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dra- matically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. ■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period. When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. As the key may be damaged if the following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key battery replacement be performed by your Lexus dealer. 413 Replacing the battery 1 Take out the mechanical key. ■ If the electronic key battery is depleted 2 Remove the cover. The following symptoms may occur: ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. ● The operational range will be reduced. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a tape. ■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped) The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you. Flathead screwdriver Small flathead screwdriver Lithium battery CR2032 ■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores. ● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. Maintenance and care Items to prepare 6 414 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance WARNING ■ Removed battery and other parts These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ When replacing the battery Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying excessive force may deform or damage the cover. ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: ● Always work with dry hands. Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Checking and replacing fuses 1 Turn the power switch off. 2 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment: type A fuse box Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other com- ponent inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery ter- minals. Engine compartment: type B fuse box Remove the engine compartment cover (→P.388) and push the tabs in and lift the lid off. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 415 Driver’s side instrument panel Push the tab in and remove the lid. Make sure to push the tab in during removal or installation. Passenger’s side instrument panel Push the tab in and remove the lid. Make sure to push the tab in during removal or installation. 3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool. 6 Trunk Remove the luggage mat. (→P.348) Push the tab in and lift the lid off. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Type A and B: Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type C and D: Contact your Lexus dealer. Maintenance and care 4 Check if the fuse is blown. 416 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Type A Type D A Normal fuse A Normal fuse B Blown fuse B Blown fuse Type B ■ After a fuse is replaced ● When installing the lid, make sure that the tab is installed securely. ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If there is an overload in a circuit A Normal fuse B Blown fuse Type C The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage. WARNING ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or A Normal fuse B Blown fuse LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. ● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes. 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 417 Light bulbs If any lights burn out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. ■ LED Lights The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations: ● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight. 6 Maintenance and care LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 418 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 419 When trouble arises 7 7-1. Essential information . Emergency flashers..................420 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency..........................420 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................................................ 422 If you think something is wrong ........................................................ 426 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ....... 427 If a warning message is displayed ........................................................ 437 If you have a flat tire.................. 442 If the hybrid system will not start ........................................................ 443 If you lose your keys................. 444 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened........................................ 445 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ........................................................ 447 If your vehicle overheats ........453 If the vehicle becomes stuck ........................................................ 457 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When trouble arises If the electronic key does not operate properly .................... 445 7 420 7-1. Essential information 7-1.Essential information Emergency flashers The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc. Operating instructions Press the switch to flash all of the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again. If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure: Stopping the vehicle 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift position to N. If the shift position is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 4 Stop the hybrid system. ■ Emergency flashers ● If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge. ● If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically. The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice. (The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If the shift position cannot be shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible. 4 To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or 7-1. Essential information 421 press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. WARNING ■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system. 7 When trouble arises LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 422 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 7-2.Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck. AWD models Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck, or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ■ When towing the vehicle 2WD models Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged, an accident may occur due to a change in direction of the vehicle or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. ■ While towing ● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage. ● Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and part of your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. (→P.301) ● Do not turn the power switch off. This may lead to an accident as the rear wheels will be locked by the parking lock. Also, there is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehi- cle Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck ● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight. ● When raising the vehicle, ensure ade- quate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. ■ To prevent damage to the vehicle Situations when it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle In the following situations, it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle using cables or chains, as the rear wheels may be locked due to the parking lock. Contact your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service. There is a malfunction in the shift LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) control system. (→P.171, 437) There is a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P.66) There is a malfunction in the smart access system with push-button start. (→P.445) The 12-volt battery is discharged. (→P.447) Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing. The hybrid system warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the vehicle does not move. The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage. 7 When trouble arises during emergency towing Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components. 423 424 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Towing with a wheel-lift type truck From the front If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°. Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. From the rear Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and the vehicle may be damaged. (→P.301) Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. Using a flatbed truck If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. 425 3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. Emergency towing procedure To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eyelet must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure. 1 Take out the phillips-head screwdriver and towing eyelet. 4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a phillips-head screwdriver or hard metal bar. A Phillips-head screwdriver B Towing eyelet 2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. 6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system. If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON mode. 7 Shift the shift position to N and release the parking brake. ■ While towing If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 Take care not to damage the vehicle body. When trouble arises To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration. 5 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet. 426 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Visible symptoms Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal. Audible symptoms Changes in exhaust sound Excessive tire squeal when cornering Strange noises related to the suspension system Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system Operational symptoms Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly Appreciable loss of power Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 427 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers ■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions (U.S.A.) Indicates that: The brake fluid level is low; or The brake system is malfunctioning → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. or (red) (Canada) Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can be detected) → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Indicates a malfunction in: The regenerative braking system; The electronically controlled brake system; or The parking brake system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ High coolant temperature warning light* (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.453) *: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 When trouble arises (yellow) Details/Actions 428 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Charging system warning light* (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. * : This light illuminates on the multi-information display. ■ Low engine oil pressure warning light* (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. * : This light illuminates on the multi-information display. ■ Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer) Warning light (U.S.A.) or (Canada) Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: The hybrid system; The electronic engine control system; The electronic throttle control system; or The electronic hybrid transmission control system → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. ■ SRS warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: The SRS airbag system; The front passenger occupant classification system; or The seat belt pretensioner system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 429 ■ Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated → The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated. Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ ABS warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light (U.S.A.) or Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in: The ABS; or The brake assist system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (Canada) ■ Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light* (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer does not sound: Brake Override System is operating → Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal. *: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 When trouble arises When a buzzer sounds: Brake Override System is malfunctioning; Drive-Start Control is operating; Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) is operating → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. 430 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light (red) or Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (yellow) ■ Low fuel level warning light Warning light Details/Actions Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 3.4 gal. (13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.) or less → Refuel the vehicle. ■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)* Warning light Details/Actions Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts → Fasten the seat belt. If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off. * : Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer: The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds. Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer: The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 431 ■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights*1 (warning buzzer)*2 Warning light Details/Actions Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts → Fasten the seat belt. *1 : This light illuminates on the center panel. *2 : Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer: The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 30 more seconds. ■ Tire pressure warning light Warning light Details/Actions When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system → Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer. When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as Natural causes Flat tire → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.435) Warning light (orange) Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) or LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.238, 246) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When trouble arises ■ LTA indicator/LKA indicator (warning buzzer) 7 432 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist function → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. When a buzzer does not sound: (flashes) Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.268) ■ RCTA OFF indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. When a buzzer does not sound: (flashes) Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is covered with dirt, etc. (→P.261) → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.274) ■ RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. When a buzzer does not sound: (flashes) (if equipped) Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the camera being dirty, etc. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.278, 437) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 433 ■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. When a buzzer does not sound: (flashes) Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.284, 437) ■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc. → Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.219, 226, 440) (flashes or illuminates) If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate. → P.219, 226 ■ Slip indicator 7 Warning light Details/Actions LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) When trouble arises Indicates a malfunction in: The VSC system; The TRAC system; The hill-start assist control system; The VGRS system (if equipped); or The DRS system (if equipped) → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. 434 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ Parking brake indicator Warning light (flashes) (U.S.A.) or Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (flashes) (Canada) ■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer) Warning light (flashes) Details/Actions Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ Master warning light (warning buzzer) Warning light Details/Actions A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. → P.437 ■ Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound. ■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer ● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. ● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■ SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the air- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) bag sensor assembly, Pop Up Hood computer assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P.29) ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: ● Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ● Is the fuel tank cap loose? 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 435 If it is, tighten it securely. The light will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Conditions that the tire pressure warn- ■ Electric power steering system warning warning lights remain on Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. light (warning buzzer) When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound. ■ When the tire pressure warning light ■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) WARNING ■ If both the ABS and the brake system ■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual. ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h). ● Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer. 7 When trouble arises comes on Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured. If a tire is punctured: →P.442 If none of the tires are punctured: Turn the power switch off then turn it to ON mode. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks. If the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute then stays on There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. If the tire pressure warning light comes on 1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level. 2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization. (→P.401) ing system may not function properly →P.398 436 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak- ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. NOTICE ■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 437 If a warning message is displayed The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message. Except F SPORT models: A Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. B Multi-information display Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display. If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. B Multi-information display Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display. If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. F SPORT models (main meter in center position): LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) F SPORT models (main meter moved to the right): 7 When trouble arises A Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. 438 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency A Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. B Multi-information display Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display. If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. Messages and warnings The master warning light and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning buzzer* Warning Comes on Sounds Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed Flashes Sounds Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning buzzer* 439 Warning Comes on Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electriDoes not sound cal components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance Flashes Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has Does not sound been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly In some situations, the master warning light and warning buzzer may not operate as specified. In this case, follow the instructions displayed in the warning message. If a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warning message is displayed, take corrective action according to the warning light. (→P.427) * : A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display. ■ Warning messages ■ If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications. Output Power” is displayed This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.) Handling method: →P.453 ■ Warning buzzer ■ If “Warming Up Maximum Vehicle In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound. ■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or ■ If “Hybrid System Stopped Steering Power Low” is displayed This message is displayed if the hybrid system is stopped while driving. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ If “Stop the Vehicle in a Safe Place Shift to P position” is displayed There may be a malfunction in the hybrid system or the shift position may be shifted to N for a long time. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer. ■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro- tected Refrain From the Use of N Position” is displayed The remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. As the hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged when the shift position is in N, when stopping the vehicle for a long period of time, shift the shift position to P. 7 When trouble arises Replace” is displayed The engine oil level is low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add if necessary. This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears. Speed: 65 MPH” is displayed The transmission is being warmed up and the vehicle is unable to be driven over 65 mph (110 km/h). Wait until the transmission warms up. 440 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro- tected Shift into P to Restart” is displayed The remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low, because the shift position has been shifted to N for a long period of time. When moving the vehicle, shift the shift position to P and restart the hybrid system. ■ If “Shift Is in N Release Accelerator Before Shifting” is displayed The accelerator pedal has been depressed when the shift position is in N. Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift position to D or R. ■ If “Depress Brake When Vehicle Is Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat” is displayed The message may be displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to hold the vehicle while the vehicle is stopped on an incline, etc. The hybrid system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal. ■ If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery” is displayed Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function. Next time when starting the hybrid system, operate the hybrid system for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery. ■ If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ● The LED headlight system ● AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) ● The automatic headlight leveling system ● AHB (Automatic High Beam) ■ If “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front Camera Unavailable Remove Debris On Windshield” is displayed The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. (→P.219, 226, 433) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● PCS (Pre-Collision system) ● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped) ● LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) (if equipped) ● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ● AHB (Automatic High Beam) ■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is dis- played Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed soon. Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset. If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.378) *: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle. ■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is displayed Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*. Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.) Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.378) *: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle. ■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is displayed Indicates that the engine oil should be scheduled to be changed. Check the engine oil and change it if necessary. After changing the engine oil, make sure to reset the message. (→P.390) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is dis- played Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the engine oil, make sure to reset the message. (→P.390) ■ If “Shift System Malfunction Driving Unavailable” is displayed There is a malfunction in the shift control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If a message that indicates the need for the shift lever operation is displayed To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift position may be displayed on the multi-information display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift position. ■ If a message that indicates the need for visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ If a message that indicates the need for LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) • “Hybrid Battery System Malfunction” • “Accelerator System Malfunction” ● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer. • “Braking Power Low” • “Charging System Malfunction” • “Oil Pressure Low” ● If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts” is shown, the filters may be clogged, the air intake vents may be blocked, or there may be a gap in the duct. Therefore, perform the following correction procedure. • If the air intake vents and filters of the hybrid battery (traction battery) are dirty, perform the procedure on P.374 to clean them. • If the warning message is shown when the air intake vents and filters of the hybrid battery (traction battery) are not dirty, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ If “High Power Consumption Partial Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is displayed frequently There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If “Have Traction Battery Inspected” is displayed This message indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) may require inspection or replacement. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not continue driving the vehicle, as the hybrid system may become not able to be started again. 7 When trouble arises referring to Owner’s Manual is displayed ● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, follow the instructions. • “Engine Coolant Temp High” (→P.453) • “Battery Low” (→P.447) • “Transmission Fluid Temp High” (→P.175) ● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. • “Access System with Elec. Key Malfunction” • “Shift System Malfunction” • “P Switch Malfunction” • “Shift System Unavailable” • “Hybrid System Malfunction” • “Check Engine” 441 442 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead you can continue driving the vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat. In this case, slow down and drive with extra caution. Run-flat tires Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible if any tire goes flat. The vehicle can be driven for a maximum of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 50 mph (80 km/h) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. (→P.431) A run-flat tire has a side wall. mark on the ■ In some conditions (such as at high tem- peratures) You cannot continue driving for up to 160 miles (100 km). ■ For the detailed information on run-flat tires See the tire warranty booklet. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) NOTICE ■ When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ When driving over bumps If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle height will be lower than usual. Ensure that nothing strikes the bottom of the vehicle. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P.401) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the hybrid system will not start Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure: 443 [-30°C]). (→P.168) * : It may not be possible to shift the shift position from P. The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (→P.168) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: One of the following may be the cause of the problem: The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P.393) The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P.445) The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.447) The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P.66) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: There may be a malfunction in the shift control system.* (→P.171, 441) One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. (→P.393) There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (→P.443) There is a possibility that the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely low (approximately below -22°F LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.447) Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. Starting the hybrid system in an emergency When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning 7 When trouble arises There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. 444 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency normally. Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency. 1 Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.181) Parking brake indicator will come on. 2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode. 3 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) If you lose your keys New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. NOTICE ■ When an electronic key is lost If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key (if equipped) that were provided with your vehicle. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 445 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened If the electronic key does not operate properly If the fuel filler door opener switch cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. In case where refueling is urgently necessary, the following procedure can be used to open the fuel filler door. If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P.120) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below. Opening the fuel filler door Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever. Using the lever to open the fuel filler door may not allow for an adequate reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling out, turn the cap slowly when removing it. During refueling, fuel may spill out from the filler opening due to air being discharged from inside the fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly. ■ When the electronic key does not work properly ● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been disabled at your Lexus dealer. If it has been disabled, re-enable it. ● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P.120) NOTICE ■ Unlocking the door Use the mechanical key (→P.106) in order to perform the following operations: When trouble arises push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 ■ In case of a smart access system with 446 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 1 Pull the driver’s door handle and insert the mechanical key. ■ Key linked functions 2 Unlock the door. 3 Remove the key, return the handle, and then pull the handle again. ■ Locking the door 1 With the door open, push down the inside lock button. 1 Closes the windows and the moon roof (turn and hold) 2 Opens the windows and the moon roof (turn and hold) These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer. WARNING ■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof. 2 Close the door. ■ Trunk Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. (→P.68) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Starting the hybrid system 1 Depress the brake pedal. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch. When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON mode. When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode. 447 If the 12-volt battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop. Restarting the hybrid system If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 4 Press the power switch. Method connecting jumper (or booster) cables to the 12-volt battery 1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried. In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer. When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked. (→P.69) 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the multi-information display. When trouble arises ■ Stopping the hybrid system Set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system. ■ Electronic key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P.413) ■ Changing power switch modes Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above. The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P.170) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 2 Open the trunk lid and remove the luggage mat. (→P.348) In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open the trunk. (→P.445) 448 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to A on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to B on the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to C on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D . A Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle) B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle) C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle) D Negative (-) battery terminal (your vehicle) 4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. 5 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off. 6 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode. in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. Method connecting jumper (or booster) cables to the exclusive jump starting terminal 1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried. When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked. (→P.69) 7 Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer. 8 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 2 Open the hood. Remove the driver side engine compartment cover 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency and fuse box cover. (→P.385, 388) 449 3 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover. Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. 4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to A on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to B on the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to C on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D . 7 B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle) C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle) D Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration 5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. When trouble arises A Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle) 450 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off. 7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode. 8 Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer. 9 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. 10 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover and install the fuse box cover and engine compartment cover. Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ● Turn off the headlights and the audio sys- tem while the hybrid system is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic. ■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged ● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the 12-volt battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. ● Some systems may require initialization. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) (→P.495) ■ When removing the 12-volt battery ter- minals When the 12-volt battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before removing the 12-volt battery terminals, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.) ■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery ● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ● The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off. If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery ● Use a Central Degassing type 12-volt battery (European Regulations). ● Use a 12-volt battery with the same case size as the previous 12-volt battery and an epuivalent 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency • If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery cannot be properly secured. • If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the 12-volt battery may discharge and the hybrid system may not be able to start. ● Use a 12-volt battery with a handle. If a 12-volt battery without a handle is used, removal is more difficult. ● After replacing, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the 12-volt battery. • Use the exhaust hose that was attached to the 12-volt battery before replacing and confirm that it is firmly connected to the hole section of the vehicle. • Use the exhaust hole plug included with the 12-volt battery replaced or the one installed on the 12-volt battery prior to the replacement. (Depending on the 12-volt battery to be replaced, the exhaust hole may be plugged.) 451 WARNING ■ When removing the 12-volt battery terminals Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury. ■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery: ● Make sure each jumper cable is con- nected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. jumper cables to come into contact with each other. 7 ● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette When trouble arises ● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery. ■ 12-volt battery precautions A Exhaust hole plug B Exhaust hole C Exhaust hose For details, consult your Lexus dealer. The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: ● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 452 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery. ■ After recharging the 12-volt battery Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers. ■ When replacing the 12-volt battery ● When the vent plug and indicator are close to the hold down clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak. ● For information regarding 12-volt bat- tery replacement, contact your Lexus dealer. ● After replacing, securely attach the exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to the exhaust hole of the replaced 12-volt battery. If not properly installed, gases (hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and exploding. NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats 453 and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating. The engine coolant temperature gauge (→P.77, 81) is in the red zone or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.) “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” or “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display. Steam comes out from under the hood. A Radiators B Cooling fan If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. Correction procedures If the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) A Reservoir B “F” line C “L” line D Coolant inlet cap 5 Add coolant if necessary. (→P.455) Water can be used in an emergency if When trouble arises 2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood. 7 454 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency coolant is unavailable. 6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.) 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. A Radiator B Cooling fan If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. 7 If the fan is not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. If the fan is operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer. If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power” is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood. A Reservoir B “F” line C “L” line 5 Remove the engine compartment cover and add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 455 coolant is unavailable. 2 Push the tab in and open the engine compartment cover. 3 Remove the engine cover. 4 Remove the caps A and B . However, if the message appears again frequently, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ When adding engine coolant Add coolant in accordance with the following procedure. 1 Remove the engine compartment cover. 5 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap A up to the “F” line C , and then replace the cap A . LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 7 When trouble arises 6 After stopping the hybrid system and waiting for 5 minutes or more, start the hybrid system again and check for the multi-information display. If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Lexus dealer. If the message is not displayed: The hybrid system temperature has dropped and the vehicle may be driven normally. 456 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency 6 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap B until it is full, and then replace the cap B . WARNING ■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns. ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot. ● After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the indicator on the power switch and the “READY” indicator are off. When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out. NOTICE ■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the cooling sys- tem Observe the following precautions: ● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.). ● Do not use any coolant additive. 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow: Recovering procedure 1 Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift position to P. 2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels. 3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction. 4 Restart the hybrid system. 5 Shift the shift position to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal. ■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle Press the 457 WARNING ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehi- cle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift position Be careful not to shift the shift position with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. ● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 7 switch to turn off TRAC. When trouble arises LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 458 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 459 Vehicle specifications 8 8-1. Specifications . Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ..............................................460 Fuel information.........................470 Tire information.......................... 472 8-2. Customization Customizable features.............481 8-3. Initialization Items to initialize ........................ 495 8 Vehicle specifications LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 460 8-1. Specifications 8-1.Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length 206.1 in. (5235 mm) Overall width 74.8 in. (1900 mm) 2WD models 57.5 in. (1460 mm)*2 57.1 in. (1450 mm)*3 AWD models 57.9 in. (1470 mm)*2 57.5 in. (1460 mm)*3 Overall height*1 Wheelbase 123.0 in. (3125 mm) Front Tread*1 2WD models 64.2 in. (1630 mm) AWD models 64.2 in. (1630 mm)*2 64.4 in. (1635 mm)*3 64.4 in. (1635 mm)*4 63.6 in. (1615 mm)*5 Rear Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) *1: *2 870 lb. (395 kg) Unladen vehicles : Without electronically modulated air suspension *3 : With electronically modulated air suspension *4: Except F SPORT models *5 : F SPORT models Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) of the instrument panel. 8-1. Specifications This number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat. 461 ■ Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. This number is also on the Certification Label. Engine 3.5 L 6-cylinder (8GR-FXS) Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm) Displacement 210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm3) Valve clearance Automatic adjustment Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Fuel Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 22.2 gal. (84.0 L, 18.5 Imp. gal.) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Model 462 8-1. Specifications Electric motor (traction motor) Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor Maximum output 131.9 kW Maximum torque 221.3 ft•lbf (300 N•m, 30.6 kgf•m) Hybrid battery (traction battery) Type Lithium-ion battery Voltage 3.7 V/cell Capacity 3.6 Ah Quantity 84 cells Overall voltage 310.8 V Lubrication system ■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Ref- erence*]) 2WD models With filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.) AWD models 7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp. qt.) 2WD models Without fil- 5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.) AWD models ter 6.8 qt. (6.4 L, 5.6 Imp. qt.) * : The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Engine oil selection “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change. Recommended viscosity (SAE): 8-1. Specifications 463 with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions. How to read oil container label: A Outside temperature Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example): • The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. • The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. Cooling system Capacity Gasoline engine 11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp. qt.) Power control unit 2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp. qt.) Do not use plain water alone. Ignition system (spark plug) Make DENSO FK20HBR8 Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications Coolant type Use either of the following: • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology 8 464 8-1. Specifications NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap. Electrical system (12-volt battery) Specific gravity reading at 68°F (20°C): 12.0 V or higher (Turn the power switch off and turn on the high beam headlights for 30 seconds.) Charging rates Quick charge 15 A max. Slow charge 5 A max. Hybrid transmission Fluid capacity* 7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS * : The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE ■ Hybrid transmission fluid type Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle. Transfer (AWD models) Oil capacity 0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 or equivalent *: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 465 Front differential (AWD models) Oil capacity 0.69 qt. (0.65 L, 0.57 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent * : Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. Rear differential 2WD models Oil capacity 0.90 qt. (0.85 L, 0.75 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent AWD models Oil capacity 1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent *: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. Pedal clearance*1 4.8 in. (122 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm) Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1 mm) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications Brakes 8 466 8-1. Specifications When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 2 seconds: comes on Parking brake indicator*2 When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 2 seconds: turns off FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 Fluid type *1: *2 FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating. When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake system warning light is not illuminated when the hybrid system is operating. (If the brake system warning light is illuminated, refer to P.427.) : Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.427.) Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Tires and wheels 19-inch tires (type A) Tire size 245/50RF19 101W Driving under normal conditions Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 118 mph (190 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 19 × 8J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 467 19-inch tires (type B) Tire size 245/50RF19 101V Driving under normal conditions Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 19 × 8J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 20-inch tires (type A) Tire size 245/45RF20 99Y Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. 20 × 8 1/2J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Wheel size 468 8-1. Specifications 20-inch tires (type B) Tire size Front tires: 245/45RF20 99Y Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102Y Driving under normal conditions Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 20-inch tires (type C) Tire size 245/45RF20 99V Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 20 × 8 1/2J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 469 20-inch tires (type D) Tire size Front tires: 245/45RF20 99V Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102V Driving under normal conditions Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law) Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J Wheel nut torque 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m) 8 Vehicle specifications LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 470 8-1. Specifications Fuel information You must only use unleaded gasoline. Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance and fuel economy. If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may void the vehicle warranty. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. ■ Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer. EPA’s lowest additives concentration program. ● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com. ■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements. Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions. ■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline ● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol [ A ]), E50 (50% ethanol [ B ]), E85 (85% ethanol [ C ]) (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol). ■ Gasoline quality standards ● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide. ● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance. ■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits. ● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 91. ● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. ■ Non-recommendation of the use of gas- oline containing MMT Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus does not recommend the use of gas- 8-1. Specifications 471 oline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knock- ing for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. NOTICE ■ Notice on fuel quality ● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged. ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● Using unleaded gasoline with an ■ When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint. ■ Fuel-related poor driveability If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty. 472 8-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols A Tire size (→P.473) B Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (→P.442) This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire. C DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P.473) D Location of treadwear indicators (→P.395) E Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. F Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire. G TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. H Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.396) I Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.466) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. J Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. K Summer tires or all season tires (→P.396) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications 473 An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. B Tire Identification Number (TIN) Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) C Tire manufacturer’s identification mark Type A D Manufacturer’s code E Manufacturing week F Manufacturing year * : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Tire size A DOT symbol* ■ Typical tire size information B Tire Identification Number (TIN) The illustration indicates typical tire size. C Tire manufacturer’s identification mark D Tire size code E Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) F Manufacturing week G Manufacturing year * : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Type B Temporary use) B Section width (millimeters) C Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) D Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) E Run-flat tire code F Wheel diameter (inches) A DOT symbol* LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) G Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) H Speed symbol (alphabet with one 8 Vehicle specifications A Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = 474 8-1. Specifications letter) ■ Tire dimensions Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. A Section width B Tire height C Wheel diameter Tire section names Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear A Bead B Sidewall C Shoulder D Tread E Belt F Inner liner G Reinforcing rubber H Carcass I Rim lines J Bead wires K Chafer LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 8-1. Specifications ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 475 when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Meaning Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Cold tire inflation pressure 476 8-1. Specifications Tire related term Curb weight Meaning The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine The sum of: (a) Curb weight Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications Tire related term 477 Meaning Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire 8 478 8-1. Specifications Tire related term Innerliner separation Intended outboard sidewall Meaning The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pres- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire sure may be inflated Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-1. Specifications Tire related term 479 Meaning Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications Test rim 8 480 8-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing * : Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8-2. Customization the list of settings that can be changed for details. 8-2.Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by using the meter control switches, the Remote Touch, Rear Multi Operation Panel or at your Lexus dealer. ■ Changing by using the meter con- trol switches or For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. ■ Changing by using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped) 1 Display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel and then touch “Settings”. 2 Touch “Seat”. Customizing vehicle features 1 Press 481 3 Select the desired setting. ■ When customizing using the Remote to select . 2 Operate the meter control switches to select the desired item to be customized. 3 According to the display, select the desired setting and then press . To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press . ■ Changing by using the Remote 2 Select “Setup” on the menu screen and select “Vehicle”. 3 Select “Vehicle Customization” or “Drive Mode Customization”. Various setting can be changed. Refer to WARNING ■ During customization As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. NOTICE ■ During customization To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features. Customizable features Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Touch 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. Touch Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the hybrid system operating while customizing the features. 482 8-2. Customization tomized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. A Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch B Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches C Settings that can be changed using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped) D Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available ■ Seat belts (→P.24) Default setting Customized setting A B C D Easy Access Buckle*1 On Off — — — O Retraction of front seat belts when vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h)*2 On Off — — — O A B C D — — — O Function *1 : If equipped *2 : Vehicles with pre-collision seat belts with comfort function ■ Vehicle proximity notification system (→P.60) Function The volume of vehicle proximity notification system sound Default setting Customized setting Level2 Level1 Level3 ■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (→P.72, 77, 81, 86) Function*1 Language Default setting English Customized setting French Spanish A B C D O O — — O O — — km (km/L) Units*2 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) miles (MPG) km (L/100 km) miles (MPG Imperial) 483 8-2. Customization Function*1 Default setting Customized setting A B C D Customizable items: →P.88 — O — — Current fuel consumption Drive information 1 Average fuel economy (after reset) Distance (driving range) Drive information 2 Average vehicle speed (after reset) Clock 12-hour display 24-hour display — O — — On Off — O — — Color 1 Color 2 O O — — — O — — — O — — Pop-up display Accent color Tachometer setting Rev indicator*3 Change according to driving mode 4000 r/min. Always tachometer Always Hybrid System Indicator 2000 - 6600 r/min. Off On Off — O — — EV indicator On Off — O — — On On (when the vehicle is stopped) O — — O Suggestion function Off *1 : For details about each function: →P.90 *2: The default setting varies according to country. *3 : F SPORT models LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications Rev peak*3 484 8-2. Customization ■ Head-up Display* (→P.92) Customized setting Function Default setting Gauge information Hybrid System Indicator Tachometer Route guidance to destination/street name* On Driving support system display A B C D — O — — Off — O — — On Off — O — — Compass* On Off — O — — Audio system operation status On Off — O — — Default setting Customized setting A B C D Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two step All doors unlocked in one step — — — O O — — O Off Shift position Driver’s door linked door O linked door unlocking operaunlocking operation tion — — O — — O * No content : If equipped ■ Door lock (→P.108, 112, 445) Function Unlocking using a mechanical key Shift position Automatic door locking funclinked door locktion ing operation Automatic door unlocking function Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) On Off Speed linked door locking operation Off — 485 8-2. Customization ■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control (→P.108, 119) Function Operating signal (Buzzers) Operation signal (Emergency flashers) Default setting Customized setting Off 5 1 to 7 On Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked 60 seconds Open door warning buzzer On Off A B C D O — — O O — — O O — — O — — — O Off 30 seconds 120 seconds Off ■ Smart access system with push-button start (→P.108, 119) Function Smart access system with push-button start Smart door unlocking Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — — — O Driver’s door All the doors O — — O — — — O As many as desired — — — O Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — — — O Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two step All doors unlocked in one step O — — O Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping and holding the driver’s door handle Off 2 seconds Number of consecutive door lock operations 2 times 1.5 seconds 2.5 seconds Function Wireless remote control Unlocking operation LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications ■ Wireless remote control (→P.106, 108, 112) 8 486 8-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D — — — O One short press Trunk unlocking operation Press and hold (short) Push twice Press and hold (long) Off Theft deterrent panic mode On Off — — — O Reservation lock On Off O — — O Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor)* On Off — O — — Default setting Customized setting A B C D Off On — — — O Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Automatic rear seat operation (door-linked rear seat return function and shift-linked rear seat reclining function) On Off — — O — ■ Trunk (→P.112) * : If equipped ■ Front seats (→P.128) Function Driver’s seat position linked head restraint height operation ■ Power rear seats* (→P.135) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 487 8-2. Customization Customized setting A B C D Door linked rear seat with More upright ottoman seatback position for than upright posi- Upright position tion exiting* — — O — Shift-linked rear seat reclining function Off — — — O Function *: Default setting On If equipped ■ Driving position memory (→P.139) Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Selecting doors linked to the memory recall function Driver’s door All doors — — — O Driver’s seat slide movement when exiting the vehicle Full O — — O Driver’s seat height movement when exiting the vehicle Off O — — O Front passenger’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle On — — — O O — — O Off Partial Full Partial Off Off Steering wheel movement Tilt only Telescopic only Tilt and telescopic 8 ■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P.149) A B C D Off Linked to the Automatic mirror folding and locking/ unlock- Linked to operaextending operation ing of the doors tion of the power switch — — — O LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Default setting Vehicle specifications Customized setting Function 488 8-2. Customization ■ Power windows and moon roof (→P.151, 153) Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Mechanical key linked operation Off On — — — O Wireless remote control linked operation Off On (open only) — — — O Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer) On Off — — — O Default setting Customized setting A B C D Standard -2 to 2 O — — O O — — O ■ Automatic light control system (→P.185) Function Light sensor sensitivity Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination Off 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds On Off — — — O Default setting Customized setting A B C D Daytime running lights On Off*1 O — — O Welcome lighting On Off — — — O AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)*2 On Off — — — O ■ Lights (→P.185) Function *1 : Except for Canada *2 : If equipped LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 489 8-2. Customization ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) and FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)* (→P.209, 220, 227) Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — — O — — Off — O — — Default setting Customized setting A B C D Lane centering function On Off — O — — Steering assist function On Off — O — — Steering wheel vibration Buzzer — O — — Alert sensitivity High Standard — O — — Vehicle sway warning function On Off — O — — Vehicle sway warning sensitivity Standard — O — — Function PCS (Pre-Collision System) and FCTA function Adjust alert timing Pedestrian alert* and FCTA function * Middle On Far Near : If equipped ■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)* (→P.230) Function Alert type Low : If equipped ■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)* (→P.240) Default setting Customized setting A B C D Lane centering function Off On — O — — Steering assist function On Off — O — — Steering wheel vibration Buzzer — O — — Standard High — O — — Function Alert type Alert sensitivity LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications * High 490 8-2. Customization Default setting Customized setting A B C D Vehicle sway warning function On Off — O — — Vehicle sway warning sensitivity Standard — O — — Function * High Low : If equipped ■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)* (→P.247) Function RSA (Road Sign Assist) Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — — O — — — O — — — O — — No notification Excess speed notification method Display only Excess speed notification level 1 mph (2 km/h) Other notifications method (No-entry notification) * Display and buzzer 3 mph (5 km/h) 5 mph (10 km/h) No notification Display only Display and buzzer : If equipped ■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (→P.260) Function BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — Bright Dim — O — — — O — — Early Alert timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Late Intermediate Only when vehicle detected in blind spot 491 8-2. Customization ■ PKSA (Parking Support Alert) (→P.265) Function Buzzer volume Default setting Level2 Customized setting Level1 Level3 A B C D — O — — ■ Intuitive parking assist (→P.266) Function Intuitive parking assist Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — ■ RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function (→P.273) Function RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — ■ RCD (Rear camera detection) function* (→P.277) Function RCD (Rear camera detection) function *: Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — If equipped ■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake) (→P.280) Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off — O — — Customized setting A B C D O — — — ■ Driving mode select switch (→P.298) Function Default setting Powertrain control in custom mode Normal LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Power Eco Vehicle specifications PKSB (Parking Support Brake) function 8 492 8-2. Customization Function Default setting Chassis control in custom mode Normal Air conditioning operation in custom mode Normal Customized setting Sport Comfort Eco A B C D O — — — O — — — ■ Electronically modulated air suspension* (→P.299) Default setting Customized setting A B C D Vehicle height control On Off — O — — Ingress/egress height control function On Off — O — — Vehicle height when parked Normal High — O — — Default setting Customized setting A B C D On Off O — — O Standard -3 to 3 O — — O Default setting Customized setting A B C D Driver’s seat temperature preference in automatic mode Standard -2 (cooler) to 2 (warmer) O — — O Passenger’s seat temperature preference in automatic mode Standard -2 (cooler) to 2 (warmer) O — — O Left-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic mode* Standard -2 (cooler) to 2 (warmer) O — — O Function *: If equipped ■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P.323) Function A/C auto switch operation Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity ■ Seat heater/seat ventilators (→P.336) Function LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 493 8-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Right-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic mode* Standard -2 (cooler) to 2 (warmer) O — — O Power switch linked automatic activation of the left-hand rear seat heater/ventilator* Off On O — — O Power switch linked automatic activation of the right-hand rear seat heater/ventilator* Off On O — — O *: If equipped ■ Heated steering wheel* (→P.336) Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Steering wheel heating preference in automatic mode Standard -2 (low) to 2 (high) O — — O Default setting Customized setting A B C D *: If equipped ■ Illumination (→P.340) Function 8 Off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — — O 30 seconds Operation after the power switch is turned off On Off — — — O Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off — — — O Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person On Off — — — O Footwell lights On Off — — — O LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Vehicle specifications Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off 494 8-2. Customization Function Default setting Customized setting A B C D Instrument panel ornament light and door trim ornament lights On Off — — — O O — — O Off Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person On Off — — — O Operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked On Off — — — O Operation of the outer foot lights when a door is opened On Off — — — O Fading out of the outer foot lights when they turn off Long Short — — — O ■ Vehicle customization ● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the entry unlock function cannot be customized. ● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the operation buzzer volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function settings. ● Some settings can be changed using a switch or the audio system screen. If a setting is changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the audio system screen until the power switch is turned off and then to ON mode. ■ Clock settings screen If the clock adjustment screen is displayed continuously when attempting to change the clock settings, the system may be mal- LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 8-3. Initialization 495 8-3.Initialization Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle: List of items to initialize Item When to initialize Reference P.284 Message indicating maintenance is required • After maintenance is performed P.378 Oil maintenance • After maintenance is performed P.390 Tire pressure warning system • When the tire inflation pressure is changed, such as when changing traveling speed or load weight. • When the tire inflation pressure is changed, such as when the tire size is changed. • When rotating the tires. • After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure. P.401 Lexus parking assist monitor* • 12-volt battery has been reinstalled. • The steering wheel has been moved while the 12-volt battery was being reinstalled. • 12-volt battery power is low. Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. • 12-volt battery has been reinstalled. Panoramic view moni- • The steering wheel has been moved while the 12-volt battery was being tor* reinstalled. • 12-volt battery power is low. Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. *: If equipped LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 8 Vehicle specifications PKSB (Parking Support • After reconnecting or changing the Brake) 12-volt battery 496 8-3. Initialization LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 497 For owners 9 9-1. For owners . Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ........................................498 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......498 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......500 9 For owners LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 498 9-1. For owners 9-1.For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS). The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule. Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le siège. Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 9-1. For owners 499 Traitement des ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas usées, effilochées ou entaillées excessivement. ATTENTION Inspectez le système de ceintures de sécurité régulièrement. Contrôlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité endommagée ne permet pas de protéger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles. 9 For owners LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 500 9-1. For owners SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English. Système de coussins gonflables SRS ■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS A Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant SRS Participe à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle B Coussins gonflables de genoux SRS Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS C Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant D Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS Participent à la protection du torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 9-1. For owners 501 E Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS • Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux • Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneau F Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège SRS (sur modèles équipés) Contribue à retenir les occupants des sièges arrière électriques ■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS A Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et cap- teurs) B Capteurs d'impact latéral (porte avant) C Coussins gonflables de genoux D Coussin gonflable passager avant E Coussins gonflables rideaux F Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF” G Coussins gonflables latéraux avant H Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant) J Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière K Prétensionneurs de ceinture de sécurité L Coussin gonflable conducteur M Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège (sur modèles équipés) N Contacts de boucle de ceinture de sécurité de siège arrière (sur modèles équipés) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) For owners I Témoin d'avertissement SRS 9 502 9-1. For owners O Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière) P Capteur de position du siège conducteur Q Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur R Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables S Capteurs d'impact avant T Ensemble informatique du capot actif Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants. ATTENTION ■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS. Le non-respect de ces précautions peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de sécurité. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec les ceintures de sécurité. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se déploie avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille: La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons: • Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales. 9-1. For owners ATTENTION • Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules aient une conception différente, un grand nombre de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le siège si votre véhicule est équipé de cette fonction. 503 ● Si vous attachez une rallonge de cein- ture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, sans l'attacher au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS déterminent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, bien que la ceinture de sécurité ne soit pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS peuvent ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité. • Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou. Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord. ● Le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS se déploie également avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable en réglant le dossier de siège de façon à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans le siège. 9 For owners LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 504 9-1. For owners ATTENTION ● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement attaché au moyen d'un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passager avant. ● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d'accident, la force engendrée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable du passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant. ● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant. ● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux. ● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les montants avant, latéraux et arrière. ● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur les sièges passagers en appui contre la porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule. 9-1. For owners ATTENTION ● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que la planche de bord, la garniture du volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord. Ces éléments peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur, passager avant et genoux SRS se déploient. 505 ● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège recouvrant les zones de déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS, car il risque de gêner le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le système ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des ● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien. pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants de coussins gonflables SRS ou aux portes avant. En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS. ● Ne touchez aucun composant immédiatement après le déploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds. ● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer ● Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet dur aux crochets à vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables rideaux SRS. zone où le coussin gonflable de genoux SRS se déploie, assurez-vous de le retirer. LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) ● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures du volant et des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus. ● Ne placez rien sur le siège du pas- sager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS du passager avant risquent de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision. 9 For owners ● Si un cache en vinyle est placé sur la après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau. 506 9-1. For owners ATTENTION ■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et ne procédez à aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures. ● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS ● Réparations, modifications, démon- tage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, des rails latéraux de toit, des panneaux de porte avant, des garnitures de porte avant ou des haut-parleurs de porte avant ● Modifications du panneau de porte avant (par exemple, perçage d'un trou dans le panneau) ● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle ● Installation d'un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils ou d'un porte-bagages de toit ● Modifications du système de suspen- sion du véhicule ● Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que les émetteurs/récepteurs radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD ● Modifications de votre véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 507 Index . What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ........................................................508 Alphabetical Index...................... 511 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 508 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting) If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus dealer. The rear door cannot be opened Is the child-protector lock set? The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed You lose your keys If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer. (→P.444) If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (→P.444) The doors cannot be locked or unlocked Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P.413) Is the power switch in ON mode? When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (→P.170) Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P.120) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (→P.111) The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (→P.116) If you think something is wrong The hybrid system does not start Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P.168) Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P.119) Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P.169) Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (→P.446) Is the 12-volt battery discharged? 1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting) (→P.447) The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P.169) The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches 509 An alarm is activated and the horn sounds Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm? The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P.68) Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms: Is the window lock switch pressed? Unlock the doors. The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P.153) Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) The power switch is turned off automatically The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for a period of time. (→P.171) A warning buzzer sounds during driving The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (→P.430) The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? (→P.181) Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (→P.427, 437) A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle Is the message displayed on the multi-information display? Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P.437) A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P.427, 437. When a problem has occurred If you have a flat tire Slow down the vehicle, drive with LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 510 What to do if... (Troubleshooting) extra caution, and take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible to have the tire replaced. (→P.442) The vehicle becomes stuck Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P.457) LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index 511 Alphabetical Index A A/C Air conditioning filter ...................................411 Front automatic air conditioning system ......................................................................... 323 Micro dust and pollen filter................... 329 Rear air conditioning system ...............333 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..............302 Warning light............................................... 429 Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS).187 Adaptive Variable Suspension System303 AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System).187 Air conditioning filter.................................... 411 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter ...................................411 Front automatic air conditioning system ......................................................................... 323 Micro dust and pollen filter................... 329 Rear air conditioning system ...............333 Airbags Airbag operating conditions.....................31 Airbag precautions for your child........ 34 Correct driving posture.............................23 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions....................................................................31 Curtain shield airbag precautions ....... 34 Front passenger occupant classification system .............................................................40 General airbag precautions ................... 34 Locations of airbags.................................... 29 Modification and disposal of airbags ..37 Side airbag operating conditions...........31 Side airbag precautions ............................ 34 Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions........................................................31 Side and curtain shield airbags precautions.................................................................. 34 SRS airbags ..................................................... 29 SRS warning light ......................................428 Alarm Alarm ..................................................................68 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Warning buzzer......................................... 427 Anchor brackets.....................................46, 55 Antennas (smart access system with push-button start)........................................ 119 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..............302 Warning light ...............................................429 Approach warning...................................... 256 Armrest............................................................ 352 Assist grips ..................................................... 352 Audio system-linked display......................90 Automatic headlight leveling system ... 186 Automatic High Beam ............................... 188 Automatic light control system............... 185 Auxiliary boxes..................................347, 349 Average fuel economy.................................88 Average vehicle speed ................................88 B Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Battery (12-volt battery) Battery checking ........................................393 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....447 Preparing and checking before winter ......................................................................... 309 Warning light ...............................................428 Battery (traction battery) ..............................61 Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).......................260 Brake Brake hold...................................................... 183 Fluid.................................................................. 465 Parking brake .................................................181 Regenerative braking .................................59 Warning light ............................................... 427 Brake assist ....................................................302 Break-in tips.....................................................159 Brightness control Instrument panel light control........79, 85 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......................260 512 Alphabetical Index C Card key .......................................................... 104 Care Aluminum wheels......................................370 Exterior ...........................................................370 Interior............................................................. 373 Seat belts........................................................ 373 Cargo capacity...............................................166 Cargo net .......................................................348 Center Display ...............................................316 Chains ............................................................... 310 Child restraint system Fixed with a LATCH system .................. 53 Fixed with a seat belt................................... 49 Front passenger occupant classification system .............................................................40 Points to remember .................................... 45 Riding with children..................................... 45 Types of child restraint system installation method ........................................................... 46 Using an anchor bracket..........................55 Child safety 12-volt battery precautions........ 394, 451 Airbag precautions...................................... 34 Child restraint system................................. 46 Heated steering wheel and seat heater precautions................................................ 337 How your child should wear the seat belt ............................................................................ 25 Moon roof precautions ............................154 Power window lock switch.....................153 Power window precautions...................152 Rear door child-protectors ....................... 111 Removed electronic key battery precautions.................................................................414 Seat belt extender precautions ............. 25 Seat belt precautions.................................. 45 Trunk precautions .........................................112 Child-protectors...............................................111 Cleaning Aluminum wheels......................................370 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Exterior............................................................370 Interior .............................................................373 Radar sensor........................ 199, 200, 206 Seat belts........................................................373 Clock ................................................. 77, 81, 353 Clock light ......................................................340 Coat hooks..................................................... 352 Coin holder.................................................... 345 Condenser .......................................................391 Console box .................................................. 346 Cooling system.............................................390 Engine overheating...................................453 Hybrid system overheating ..................454 Cornering lights.............................................187 Cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..........................247, 250 Cup holders................................................... 345 Current fuel consumption ..........................88 Curtain shield airbags .................................. 29 Customizable features............................... 481 D Daytime running light system.................. 185 Defogger Outside rear view mirrors.....................324 Rear window ................................................324 Windshield....................................................324 Differential Front differential oil................................... 465 Rear differential oil.................................... 465 Dimension ......................................................460 Dinghy towing.................................................167 Display Center Display............................................. 316 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..................................... 250 Energy monitor..............................................96 Head-up display............................................ 92 Intuitive parking assist..............................266 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................243 LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) ...................234 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index Multi-information display..........................86 Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) ..............................................295 RCD (Rear Camera Detection).........277 RCTA .............................................................. 273 Warning message..................................... 437 Distance until next engine oil change .....................................................................79, 84 Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 379 Door courtesy lights...................................340 Door lock Doors................................................................108 Smart access system with push-button start................................................................... 119 Wireless remote control......................... 106 Doors Automatic door locking and unlocking system ..............................................................112 Door closer ....................................................... 111 Door glasses................................................... 151 Door lock........................................................108 Open door warning buzzer .......... 109, 111 Outside rear view mirrors ......................149 Rear door child-protectors ....................... 111 Drive distance..................................................88 Drive info 1/Drive info 2 ..............................88 Driver’s seat position memory Driving position memory.........................139 Memory recall function ............................142 Power easy access system.....................139 Drive-start control ........................................159 Driving Break-in tips.................................................. 159 Correct driving posture.............................23 Driving mode select switch..................298 Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....................307 Procedures .................................................... 158 Winter drive tips.........................................309 Driving information display ........................ 87 Driving position memory............................139 Memory recall function ............................142 Power easy access system.....................139 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 513 Driving range ...................................................88 Driving support system information display .............................................................................90 DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) ..............303 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.............................247, 250 Warning message.....................................259 Dynamic Rear Steering (DRS) ..............303 E ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System) ................................................................302 EDR (Event data recorder)............................7 Elapsed time .....................................................88 Electric motor (traction motor)................58 Electric Power Steering (EPS) ..............303 Warning light .............................................. 430 Electronic key ................................................ 104 Battery-saving function............................ 120 If the electronic key does not operate properly.......................................................445 Replacing the battery.................................413 Electronically Controlled Brake System (ECB) ............................................................302 Electronically modulated air suspension .......................................................................... 299 Emergency flashers.................................... 420 Emergency, in case of If a warning buzzer sounds................... 427 If a warning light turns on....................... 427 If a warning message is displayed.....437 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....447 If the electronic key does not operate properly.......................................................445 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ..........................................................................445 If the hybrid system will not start ........443 If you have a flat tire ..................................442 If you lose your keys.................................444 If you think something is wrong..........426 If your vehicle becomes stuck.............457 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an 514 Alphabetical Index emergency ................................................420 If your vehicle needs to be towed..... 422 If your vehicle overheats........................453 Energy monitor ....................................... 96, 97 Engine ACCESSORY mode ...............................170 Compartment .............................................387 Engine compartment cover................ 388 Engine switch................................................ 168 Hood............................................................... 385 How to start the hybrid system ........... 168 Identification number.................................461 If the hybrid system will not start........ 443 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................................................420 Ignition switch (power switch)............. 168 Overheating.................................................453 Power switch ................................................ 168 Tachometer .............................................. 77, 81 Engine compartment cover....................388 Engine coolant Capacity.........................................................463 Checking .......................................................390 Preparing and checking before winter .........................................................................309 Engine coolant temperature gauge .77, 81 Engine oil Capacity......................................................... 462 Checking ...................................................... 388 Preparing and checking before winter .........................................................................309 Warning light...............................................428 Engine oil maintenance data ..................390 Engine switch (power switch) ................. 168 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................................................420 EPS (Electric Power Steering) ..............303 Warning light...............................................430 EV drive mode................................................172 EV indicator...................................................... 59 Event data recorder (EDR)............................7 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) F FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)..........227 First-aid kit storage belt ............................ 349 Flat tire Tire pressure warning system .............397 Floor mats...........................................................22 Fluid Brake............................................................... 465 Hybrid transmission..................................464 Washer ............................................................ 391 Footwell light .................................................340 Front air conditioning system................. 323 Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA)..........227 Front passenger occupant classification system .............................................................. 40 Front seats Adjustment..................................................... 128 Cleaning.........................................................373 Correct driving posture ............................ 23 Driving position memory........................ 139 Head restraints..............................................144 Memory recall function.............................142 Power easy access system .................... 139 Refresh system ............................................. 133 Seat heaters ..................................................336 Seat position memory .............................. 139 Seat ventilators............................................336 Front side marker light Light switch ....................................................185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Turn signal lever ..........................................180 Fuel Capacity .......................................................... 461 Fuel gauge................................................. 77, 81 Information ....................................................470 Refueling.......................................................... 194 Type................................................................... 461 Warning light .............................................. 430 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index Fuel consumption Average fuel economy..............................88 Current fuel consumption........................88 Fuel filler door If the fuel filler door cannot be opened .........................................................................445 Refueling ..........................................................194 Fuel gauge...................................................77, 81 Fuses ...................................................................414 G Garage door opener .................................358 Gauges.........................................................77, 81 Gear Position...................................................89 G-force...............................................................89 Glove box....................................................... 344 Glove box light............................................. 345 H Hands Free Power Trunk Lid .................... 115 Head restraints...............................................144 Headlights Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS) ...........................................................................187 Automatic High Beam system.............188 Light switch.................................................... 185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Head-up display.............................................. 92 Driving information display area........... 92 Driving support system display area ..95 HUD (Head-up display) switch............ 94 Hybrid System Indicator...........................96 Navigation system-linked display ........ 92 Pop-up display...............................................95 Settings .............................................................. 94 Heated steering wheel.............................. 336 Heaters Front air conditioning system.............. 323 Heated steering wheel............................336 Outside rear view mirrors .................... 324 Rear air conditioning system ...............333 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 515 Seat heaters ..................................................336 Height control Electronically modulated air suspension .........................................................................300 High-voltage components ...........................61 Hill-start assist control...............................303 Hood Open............................................................... 385 Pop Up Hood.................................................38 Hooks Coat hooks ...................................................352 Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 22 Horn....................................................................147 HUD (Head-up display) switch................ 94 Hybrid battery (traction battery) Location...............................................................61 Specification .................................................462 Warning message........................................64 Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents ............................................................................. 64 Hybrid system..................................................58 Emergency shut off system......................64 Energy monitor/consumption screen96 EV drive mode..............................................172 High voltage components .........................61 Hybrid system precautions........................61 If the hybrid system will not start ........443 Overheating.................................................454 Power (ignition) switch............................168 Regenerative braking .................................59 Starting the hybrid system......................168 Vehicle proximity notification system.60 Hybrid System Indicator............. 78, 83, 96 Hybrid transmission......................................174 M mode ............................................................179 Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179 Snow mode.....................................................177 Hybrid vehicle driving tips....................... 307 I I/M test ............................................................382 516 Alphabetical Index Identification Engine ...............................................................461 Vehicle............................................................460 Ignition switch (power switch) ................ 168 Auto power off function .............................171 Changing the power switch modes ..170 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................................................420 Immobilizer system........................................ 66 Indicators ............................................................74 Initialization Items to initialize .........................................495 Maintenance ................................... 378, 390 Power windows............................................. 151 Tire pressure warning system.............. 401 Inside door handle lights ..........................340 Inside rear view mirror............................... 148 Instrument panel light control ...........79, 85 Interior lights..................................................340 Front interior light ......................................340 Rear interior light .......................................340 Intuitive parking assist.....................265, 266 Function..........................................................266 Warning message.....................................268 J Jack Positioning a floor jack........................... 385 Jam protection function Moon roof .......................................................154 Power trunk opener and closer............ 116 Power windows............................................. 151 Rear door sunshade ................................355 K Keyless entry Smart access system with push-button start................................................................... 119 Wireless remote control......................... 106 Keys Battery-saving function ............................120 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Electronic key ............................................... 104 If the electronic key does not operate properly.......................................................445 If you lose your keys.................................444 Key number plate ....................................... 104 Keyless entry ........................................108, 119 Mechanical key............................................ 104 Power switch.................................................168 Replacing the battery.................................413 Warning buzzer............................................ 119 Wireless remote control .........................106 Knee airbags .................................................... 29 L Lane Tracing Assist (LTA) Operation......................................................230 Warning messages...................................238 Lane-Keeping Assist (LKA) Operation......................................................240 Warning messages...................................246 Language (multi-information display) ...90 LATCH anchors ............................................. 53 LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system) ..........................................................................303 Lever Auxiliary catch lever ................................ 385 Hood lock release lever........................ 385 Internal trunk release lever....................... 117 Shift lever..........................................................174 Turn signal lever ..........................................180 Wiper lever....................................................190 Lexus climate concierge ............................321 Lexus Dynamic Handling system (LDH) ..........................................................................303 Lexus Enform Safety Connect............... 364 Lexus Safety System+ Automatic High Beam .............................188 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..........................247, 250 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................240 PCS (Pre-Collision System)................220 RSA (Road Sign Assist).......................... 247 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index Lexus Safety System+A..............................196 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range..........................247, 250 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) ......227 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................230 PCS (Pre-Collision System)................209 RSA (Road Sign Assist) ......................... 247 License plate lights Light switch.................................................... 185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Light bulbs Replacing.........................................................417 Lights Automatic High Beam system.............188 Front interior lights......................................341 Front personal lights...................................341 Headlight switch ......................................... 185 Interior lights.................................................340 Interior lights list..........................................340 Rear interior lights .......................................341 Rear personal lights....................................341 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Trunk lid light................................................... 116 Trunk light......................................................... 116 Turn signal lever..........................................180 Vanity lights ..................................................354 Welcome light illumination control ... 186 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) Operation......................................................240 Warning messages .................................. 246 Lock steering column ..................................169 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) Operation......................................................230 Warning messages ..................................238 Luggage mats ...............................................348 M Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance .................383 General maintenance ............................. 379 Maintenance data......................................460 Maintenance requirements ..................378 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 517 Malfunction indicator lamp .....................428 Master warning light .................................. 434 Menu icons........................................................ 86 Meter Changing the main meter location......85 Clock............................................................ 77, 81 Hybrid System Indicator ..................78, 83 Indicators........................................................... 74 Instrument panel light control........79, 85 Meter control switches ..............................87 Meters.......................................................... 77, 81 Multi-information display ..........................86 Settings...............................................................90 Units.....................................................................89 Warning lights............................................. 427 Warning message.....................................437 Micro dust and pollen filter ..................... 329 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror............................. 148 Outside rear view mirror defoggers324 Outside rear view mirrors...................... 149 Vanity mirrors..............................................354 Moon roof Door lock linked moon roof operation ........................................................................... 154 Jam protection function........................... 154 Operation....................................................... 153 Multi-information display ............................ 86 Audio system-linked display...................90 Drive information 1/Drive information 2 ............................................................................ 88 Driving information display......................87 Driving support system information display....................................................................90 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..................................... 250 Energy monitor.............................................. 97 Gear Position .................................................89 G-force..............................................................89 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................243 LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) ...................234 Menu icons ......................................................86 518 Alphabetical Index Meter control switches.............................. 87 Navigation system-linked display ........89 Pop-up display...............................................86 Settings ..............................................................90 Suggestion function.......................................91 Tire pressure................................................ 397 Units ....................................................................89 Vehicle sway warning................................89 Warning message..................................... 437 N Navigation system-linked display....89, 92 Noise from under vehicle ...............................6 O “ODO TRIP”switch ...............................79, 85 Odometer .................................................79, 84 Odometer and trip meter display Display items.......................................... 79, 84 “ODO TRIP” switch........................... 79, 85 Pop-up display...................................... 79, 85 Oil Engine oil ....................................................... 462 Front differential oil ...................................465 Rear differential oil ....................................465 Opener Fuel filler door................................................194 Hood............................................................... 385 Trunk ....................................................................114 Outer foot lights Location..........................................................340 Outside door handle lights......................340 Outside rear view mirrors Adjustment......................................................149 BSM (Blind Sport Monitor) .................260 Folding ............................................................. 150 Linked mirror function when reversing ...........................................................................149 Mirror position memory...........................139 Outside rear view mirror defoggers324 RCTA function............................................ 273 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Outside temperature..............................77, 81 Overheating .................................................. 453 P Paddle shift switches ..........................178, 179 Panic mode ..................................................... 106 Parking assist sensors (intuitive parking assist) ............................................................. 266 Parking brake Operation.........................................................181 Parking brake engaged warning buzzer ........................................................................... 182 Warning light ...............................................434 Warning message...................................... 182 Parking lights Light switch ....................................................185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Parking Support Brake function (for rear-crossing vehicles) ............................291 Function ............................................................291 Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians).................................... 280, 295 Function ..........................................................295 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).........................280 Parking Support Brake function (static objects)............................................. 280, 286 Function ......................................................... 286 PCS (Pre-Collision System) Function ............................................. 209, 220 PCS OFF switch .............................. 212, 222 Warning light ...............................................433 Warning message...........................219, 226 Personal lights...............................................340 PKSA (Parking Support Alert).............. 265 PKSB (Parking Support Brake).............280 Warning message.....................................284 Pop Up Hood...................................................38 Power control unit............................................61 Power control unit coolant Capacity .........................................................463 Checking ...................................................... 390 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index Preparing and checking before winter .........................................................................309 Power easy access system ........................139 Power outlets ................................................353 Power rear seat..............................................135 Power steering (Electric power steering system)..........................................................303 Warning light...............................................430 Power switch .................................................. 168 Auto power off function .............................171 Changing the power switch modes ..170 Power switch (engine switch) If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................................................420 Power trunk opener and closer ............... 114 Power windows Door lock linked window operation..152 Jam protection function............................. 151 Operation......................................................... 151 Window lock switch ..................................153 Pre-Collision System (PCS) Function..............................................209, 220 PCS OFF switch...............................212, 222 Warning light...............................................433 Warning message...........................219, 226 R Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range)..247, 250 Radiator.............................................................391 RCD (Rear camera detection).............. 265 Warning message..................................... 278 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) Function...........................................................277 RCTA Function.......................................................... 273 Warning message..................................... 274 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ......... 265 RCTA function ..............................................274 Rear air conditioning system ..................333 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......... 273 Rear door sunshades.................................355 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 519 Rear Multi Operation Panel .................... 318 Rear seat position memory .......................143 Rear seats .........................................................135 Adjustment..................................................... 135 Head restraints..............................................144 Rear seat position memory.....................143 Relaxation system....................................... 138 Seat heaters ..................................................336 Seat ventilators............................................336 Rear side marker lights Light switch ....................................................185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Rear sunshades ............................................356 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Turn signal lever ..........................................180 Rear view mirror Inside rear view mirror............................. 148 Outside rear view mirrors...................... 149 Rear window defogger ............................. 324 Refueling Capacity .......................................................... 461 Fuel types........................................................ 461 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ..........................................................................445 Opening the fuel tank cap ..................... 194 Regenerative braking................................... 59 Remote Touch ................................................314 Replacing Electronic key battery................................413 Fuses...................................................................414 Light bulbs.......................................................417 Tires ................................................................. 405 Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required...................................... 378 Rev indicator ....................................................83 Rev peak.............................................................83 Road Sign Assist ...........................................247 RSA (Road Sign Assist) .............................247 Run-flat tires........................................397, 442 520 Alphabetical Index S Seat belt buckle lights................................340 Seat belt reminder light...................430, 431 Seat belts............................................................ 24 Automatic Locking Retractor ................ 26 Child restraint system installation......... 46 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt ......................................................................... 373 Easy Access Buckle.................................... 26 Emergency Locking Retractor.............. 26 How to wear your seat belt..................... 25 How your child should wear the seat belt ............................................................................ 25 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use .............................................................................24 Reminder light and buzzer........ 430, 431 Seat belt extender ........................................ 25 SRS warning light ......................................428 Seat heaters................................................... 336 Seat position memory........................139, 143 Seat ventilators............................................. 336 Seating capacity.............................................166 Seats Adjustment...........................................128, 135 Adjustment precautions...........................128 Child seats/child restraint system installation .................................................................... 45 Cleaning......................................................... 373 Driving position memory.........................139 Front seat refresh system.........................133 Head restraints .............................................144 Power easy access system.....................139 Properly sitting in the seat.........................23 Rear seat relaxation system................... 138 Seat heaters..................................................336 Seat position memory .................... 139, 143 Seat ventilators............................................336 Secondary Collision Brake .....................302 Sensor Automatic headlight system.................. 185 Automatic High Beam system.............188 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Inside rear view mirror............................. 148 Intuitive parking assist..............................266 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................240 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................230 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)........................291 Parking Support Brake function (static objects)........................................................287 Radar sensor...........................197, 204, 261 Rain-sensing windshield wipers............ 191 RCTA............................................................... 274 Service plug ........................................................61 Service reminder message ..................... 378 Shift lever Hybrid transmission....................................174 Shift lever light ..............................................340 Shopping bag hooks ..................................348 Side airbags ...................................................... 29 Side marker lights Light switch ....................................................185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Side mirrors Adjustment..................................................... 149 BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)................. 260 Folding..............................................................150 Linked mirror function when reversing ........................................................................... 149 Mirror position memory.......................... 139 RCTA function ............................................ 273 Side turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Turn signal lever ..........................................180 Side windows ...................................................151 Smart access system with push-button start Antenna location........................................... 119 Entry functions..............................................108 Starting the hybrid system......................168 Snow mode ...................................................... 177 Snow tires .......................................................309 Spark plug ...................................................... 463 Specifications................................................460 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index Speedometer .............................................77, 81 Steering lock Column lock release..................................169 Steering lock system warning message ...........................................................................169 Steering wheel Adjustment......................................................147 Heated steering wheel............................336 Meter control switches.............................. 87 Power easy access system.....................139 Steering wheel position memory ........139 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Storage features .......................................... 343 Stuck If the vehicle becomes stuck................ 457 Suggestion function.........................................91 Sun visors........................................................ 354 Sunshade Roof ....................................................................154 Switches Activating the Automatic High Beam ..........................................................................188 Automatic High Beam system.............188 Brake Hold switch ..................................... 183 Door lock switches...................................... 110 Driving mode select switch..................298 Driving position memory switches.....139 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range switch.........................251 Emergency flashers switch...................420 EV drive mode switch .............................. 172 Garage door opener switches ......... 358 Heated steering wheel switch.............336 HUD (Head-up display) switch............ 94 Ignition switch............................................... 168 Instrument panel light control switches ................................................................... 79, 85 Intuitive parking assist switch............... 267 Light switches............................................... 185 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch.. 242 LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) switch.... 234 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 521 Meter control switches ..............................87 Moon roof switches................................... 153 “ODO TRIP”switch ............................79, 85 Outside rear view mirror switches .... 149 Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179 Parking brake switch...................................181 PCS OFF switch .............................. 212, 222 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) switch ........................................................................... 281 Power door lock switch ............................110 Power switch.................................................168 Power window switches ...........................151 RCD (Rear camera detection) switch .......................................................................... 277 RCTA switch................................................ 273 Rear door sunshade switch................. 355 Rear seat heater..........................................334 Rear seat position memory switches.143 Rear seat ventilator ...................................334 Rear sunshades switch........................... 356 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ............................323 Seat heater switches.................................336 Seat ventilator switches ..........................336 Snow mode switch......................................177 “SOS” button................................................364 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch ............................................................................147 Tire pressure warning reset switch.... 401 Trunk closer switch......................................115 Trunk opener main switch........................118 Trunk opener switch ................................... 114 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.... 251 VSC OFF switch ...................................... 304 Window lock switch.................................. 153 Windshield wiper and washer switch190 Windshield wiper de-icer switch....... 327 T Tachometer.................................................77, 81 Rev indicator ...................................................83 Rev peak............................................................83 522 Alphabetical Index Tail lights Light switch.................................................... 185 Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Theft deterrent system Alarm ..................................................................68 Immobilizer system......................................66 Tire inflation pressure Maintenance data......................................466 Tire inflation pressure display function ......................................................................... 397 Warning light.................................................431 Tire information.............................................472 Glossary......................................................... 475 Size.................................................................... 473 Tire identification number ..................... 473 Uniform Tire Quality Grading............ 474 Tire pressure display.................................. 397 Tire pressure warning system Function.......................................................... 397 Initializing ........................................................ 401 Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ....................................... 401 Registering ID codes...............................403 Warning light.................................................431 Tires Chains .............................................................. 310 Checking .......................................................395 If you have a flat tire.................................. 442 Inflation pressure....................................... 408 Information.................................................... 472 Replacing.......................................................405 Rotating tires ................................................ 397 Run-flat tires ..................................... 397, 442 Size....................................................................466 Snow tires......................................................309 Tire inflation pressure display function ......................................................................... 397 Tire pressure warning system............. 397 Warning light.................................................431 Top tether strap............................................... 55 Total load capacity......................................460 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) Towing Dinghy towing ...............................................167 Emergency towing.................................... 422 Towing eyelet...............................................425 Trailer towing................................................ 166 TRAC (Traction Control) ........................303 Traction battery (hybrid battery) Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents .............................................................................64 Location...............................................................61 Specification .................................................462 Warning message........................................64 Traction Control (TRAC) ........................303 Traction motor (electric motor) ...............58 Trailer towing ..................................................166 Transmission Driving mode select switch ................. 298 Hybrid transmission....................................174 M mode ............................................................179 Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179 Snow mode.....................................................177 Trip meters ................................................79, 84 Trunk.................................................................... 112 Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.................115 Internal trunk release lever....................... 117 Power trunk opener and closer ............ 114 Smart access system with push-button start ...................................................................115 Trunk closer switch......................................115 Trunk easy closer.......................................... 116 Trunk features............................................. 348 Trunk grip ......................................................... 116 Trunk lid light................................................... 116 Trunk light......................................................... 116 Trunk opener main switch........................118 Trunk opener switch ................................... 114 Wireless remote control ...........................115 Trunk lid light.................................................... 116 Trunk light.......................................................... 116 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs..................................417 Turn signal lever ..........................................180 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index U USB charging ports......................................351 V Vanity lights.................................................... 354 Vanity mirrors ............................................... 354 Variable Gear Ratio Steering (VGRS)303 VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)......................................................303 Vehicle data recordings ..................................7 Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management (VDIM)..............................................303 Vehicle identification number................460 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) ...........302 Vehicle sway warning display ...................89 Ventilators (seat ventilators)................... 336 VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)303 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ...........302 W Warning buzzers ABS .................................................................. 429 Airbags ...........................................................428 Approach warning....................................256 Brake hold..................................................... 434 Brake Override System......................... 429 Brake system ............................................... 427 Charging system .......................................428 Downshifting..................................................179 Drive-Start Control .................................. 429 Electric power steering ..........................430 Engine .............................................................428 High coolant temperature .................... 427 Hybrid system .............................................428 Intuitive parking assist...................272, 432 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).......240, 431 Low engine oil pressure.........................428 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......... 230, 431 Open door.............................................. 109, 111 Open window...............................................152 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 523 PKSA (Parking Support Alert) ...........266 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) .........433 Pop Up Hood..............................................429 Pre-collision braking..................... 209, 221 RCD (Rear Camera Detection) ........432 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ......432 Seat belt ...............................................430, 431 Warning label ....................................................61 Warning lights................................................427 ABS...................................................................429 Brake hold operated indicator ...........434 Brake Override System .........................429 Brake system................................................ 427 Charging system........................................428 Drive-Start Control...................................429 Electric power steering.......................... 430 High coolant temperature..................... 427 Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator432 LKA indicator.................................................431 Low engine oil pressure.........................428 Low fuel level .............................................. 430 LTA indicator .................................................431 Malfunction indicator lamp...................428 Master warning light.................................434 Parking brake indicator ..........................434 PKSB OFF indicator ................................433 Pop Up Hood..............................................429 Pre-collision system..................................433 RCD OFF indicator..................................432 RCTA OFF indicator...............................432 Seat belt reminder light................430, 431 Slip indicator.................................................433 SRS....................................................................428 Tire pressure ..................................................431 Warning messages..................................... 437 Warning reflector storage belt.............. 349 Washer Checking ........................................................ 391 Preparing and checking before winter ......................................................................... 309 Switch................................................................190 Washing and waxing.................................. 370 524 Alphabetical Index Weight Cargo capacity.............................................166 Load limits .......................................................166 Weight ............................................................460 Wheels Replacing wheels.......................................405 Size....................................................................466 Window lock switch .....................................153 Windows Power windows............................................. 151 Rear window defogger .......................... 324 Washer ............................................................ 190 Windshield wiper de-icer ........................ 329 Windshield wipers Position .............................................................192 Rain-sensing windshield wipers.......... 190 Winter driving tips.......................................309 Wireless remote control Battery-Saving Function ..........................120 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 106 Replacing the battery.................................413 ? For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”. · Navigation system · Audio/visual system · Rear seat entertainment system · Lexus parking assist monitor LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 525 526 Alphabetical Index LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical (Troubleshooting) Index LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U) 527 528 GAS STATION INFORMATION A Auxiliary catch lever (→P.385) B Trunk opener (→P.114) C Fuel filler door opener (→P.195) D Fuel filler door (→P.195) E Hood lock release lever (→P.385) F Tire inflation pressure (→P.466) Fuel tank capacity (Ref22.2 gal. (84.0 L, 18.5 Imp. gal.) erence) Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P.461 P.470 Cold tire inflation pressure P.466 Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill ⎯ reference) P.462 Engine oil type P.462 LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Has XFA : No Language : en XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08 Modify Date : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00 Create Date : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00 Metadata Date : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:e6544e6f-5a83-4faf-ab5d-6243bf8377de Instance ID : uuid:acd6a33b-edb3-4ae4-847c-3dbf2d5d3ea9 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 528EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools